1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 Sport Sedan M2003
Safety 10
Security 37
Instruments and controls 53
Interior equipment 97
Starting and driving 121
Car care 171
Maintenance and owner assistance 229
Technical data 235
Index 251
© Saab Automobile AB 2002
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instrument panel
Fuel gauge __________________
Speedometer ________________
Turbo gauge _________________
Temperature gauge____________
Warning and indicator lights _____
Tachometer__________________
Odometer and trip meter________
61
60
61
60
54
59
59
Saab Information display (SID) ___
Profiler ______________________
Clock _______________________
64
64
69
Direction indicators _______ 75
High/low beam control stalk
72
Cruise Control___________ 140
Replacing wiper blades ___ 186
Washers and wipers______ 76
Washer fluid ____________ 186
Rear fog light____________ 74
Front fog lights___________ 74
High/low beam __________ 72
Changing bulbs__________ 188
Headlight levelling________ 73
Parking lights____________ 72
Automatic climate control __
Manual climate control ____
84
79
Car care and maintenance_ 224
Seat heating____________
Seat heating, ACC _______
Hazard warning lights_____
83
92
75
Ashtray _____________________ 108
Cigarette lighter _______________ 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Exterior
Maximum loads _______________ 236
Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 161
Roof load ____________________ 161
Hood _______________________ 172
Washing the engine bay_________ 218
Body __________________ 219
Touching up paintwork ____ 219
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 220
Service program _________ 230
Sunroof ________________ 102
Washing _______________ 218
Waxing and polishing _____ 219
Front lights _____________ 190
Direction indicators_______
75
Changing bulbs _________ 188
Headlight levelling (Bi-
Xenon) _______________
Dipswitch ______________
Headlight switches _______
73
72
72
Headlight washers _______ 186
Taillights _______________ 194
Brake lights _____________ 194
Changing bulbs__________ 188
Light switches ___________ 72
Trunk lock______________
Central locking __________
Lock buttons____________
Child safety locks ________
41
38
38
42
Trunk__________________ 116
Lighting ________________ 194
Folding down the rear seat _ 116
Load-through hatch_______ 117
Spare wheel ____________ 119
Tools __________________ 119
Braking _____________________ 141
Tires _______________________ 206
Tire pressure ________________ 245
Tire pressure monitor __________ 207
Wheels _____________________ 243
Changing wheels______________ 214
Spare wheel _________________ 212
Winter driving ________________ 155
Fuel grade _____________ 240
Fuel gauge _____________ 61
Economical motoring _____ 153
Fuel filler door __________ 128
Refueling ______________ 128
Towing_________________ 164
Towing hook eyes ________ 164
Towing a trailer __________ 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Interior
Interior rearview mirror _________ 111
Vanity mirror _________________ 106
Door mirrors__________________ 110
Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 197
Interior light switches ___________ 105
Sunroof _____________________ 102
Airbag _________________ 26
Steering wheel adjustment _ 98
Steering _______________ 242
Airbag_________________
Child seats _____________
Safety belts ____________
Safety belt care _________ 217
Child safety locks ________ 42
26
21
11
Fuses _________________ 199
Electric windows _________ 99
Glove compartment ______ 109
Storage compartments____ 109
Automatic transmission ___ 134
Manual transmission _____ 133
Changing gears _________ 133
Rear seat _________________
Child seats ________________
Safety belts ________________
Folding down the rear seat ____
Upholstery care ____________
Seat adjustment ____________
116
21
11
116
217
16
Break-In Period _______________ 132
Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 155
Parking _____________________ 148
Starting the engine ____________ 123
Ignition switch ________________ 122
Parking brake_________________ 148
Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 108
Seat heating _______________ 83, 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Engine bay
Engine: description ____________ 173
Changing engine oil____________ 177
Engine oil: checking
level/topping up ______________ 176
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 238
Engine: technical data __________ 238
Important considerations for driving 125
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 179
Driving in hot climates __________ 156
Radiator_____________________ 238
Temperature gauge ____________
60
Vehicle identification number 246
Color code______________ 246
Engine number __________ 246
Warning labels __________
Gearbox number _________ 246
ABS brakes_____________ 141
Brake pads _____________ 180
Brake system ___________ 242
Brake fluid______________ 180
7
Exhaust emission control __ 126
Drive belt_______________ 185
Simple troubleshooting
(A/C, ACC)_____________ 224
Alternator ______________ 185
Turbo gauge ____________ 61
Spark plugs_____________ 240
Ignition system __________ 240
Changing a fuse_________ 199
Fuses _________________ 199
Relays ________________ 203
Fuse table _____________ 203
Wash/wipe stalk switch____
76
Topping-up fluid _________ 186
Washer jets ____________ 187
Washer fluid ____________ 186
Engine oil: checking level __ 176
Automatic transmission _________ 134
Manual transmission ___________ 133
Gearbox: technical data_________ 241
Power steering________________ 181
Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 181
Battery ______________________ 182
Battery charge ________________ 182
Jump starting _________________ 168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Warning labels
Drive belt:
Radiator fan:
Danger! Moving belt
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
A/C system:
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-
ual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 680 g R134a.
Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106 SP-10.
LEVEL INDICATOR
INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU
DARK
/
NOIR
OK
CLEAR
CLAIR
LOW
BAS
DANGER/POISON
No sparks, flames or smoking.
700 CCA (SAE)
DANGER/POISON
700 CCA (SAE)
•
•
•
•
Flush eyes immediatly with water
Get medical help fast.
•
•
Éviter les étincelles et les flammes. Ne pas fumer.
•
•
Rincer immédiatement les yeux avec de
l'oau Consulter un médecin rapidement.
Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury.
Protéger les yeux car les gaz explosife peuvent
causer la cécité ou des blessures.
Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
Ne pas pencher ni ouvrir la batterie.
•
Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe
burns.
KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN.
•
L'acide sulfurique peut causer la cécité ou des
brûlures graves.
GARDER HORS DE LA PORTÉE DES
ENFANTS
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY-P/N 53 52 000
12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)
BATTERIE SANS ENTRETIEN-P/N 53 52 000
12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)
Saab Automobile AB 53 53 057 Manufactured by Tudor Spain (Exide Technologies)
12102-EP
Saab Automobile AB 53 53 085 Fabriquée par Tudor Espagne (Exide Technologies)
12103-EP
Battery:
• No sparks, flames or smoking
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
CANADA
NETTOYERLEBOUCHON
DE REMPLISSAGE
AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
UTILISER SEULEMENT
DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-
ENANT D’UN CONTE-
NANT SCELLÉ.
• NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
• SHIELD EYES
• KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
• ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• EXPLOSIVE GAS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Jack
• Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
tire snow chains.
• Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
and level ground.
• Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTION
USA
1
Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
changed.
3
Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
one-half turn.
5
6
7
Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
wheel is not loose.
Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
CANADA
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
Long loads:
Always secure load to prevent it
from shifting during transport.
Changing wheels:
Use onlevelgroundonly. Usevehicle
support stands. Safe working load
1980 lbs. (900 kg).
This label is only found on
cars with xenon headlights.
An unsecured load could cause
passenger injuries in braking situa-
tions or in the event of a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Example of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks,
flames or
smoking
Windshield
wipers
Coolant tem-
perature
Buckle up
Airbag
Headlights
Radiator fan
Fuel
Refer to
the Owner’s
Manual
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
No charge to
battery
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat
Shield eyes
Parking lights
Defroster
Foot brake
Keep out of
reach of
children
Electric
windows
Hazard warn-
ing lights
Rear window
heating
Coolant level
Battery acid
contains sul-
phuric acid
Deactivating
ofrearwindow
switches
Front fog
lights
Engine oil
pressure
Cabin fan
Risk of
explosive gas
Central
locking, lock
Rear fog light
ABS brakes
Central
locking,
unlock
Trunk lid,
opening
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
11
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
Safety belts
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
WARNING
• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the safety
belt reminder in the main instrument panel
will come on if the driver has not buckled up.
In addition an audible signal sounds for 4–
8 seconds, or until the driver fastens his
belt.
The front seat passenger is reminded to
buckle up by the Saab Information Display
(SID).
• Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all occupants.
• Child safety, see page 21.
• Check that the locking tongue is prop-
erly locked in the belt lock.
Driver seat safety belt reminder
• In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
passengers not wearing a safetybelt
will be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
Use your seatbelt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Safety
Consider this:
Correct position for safety belt
WARNING
• Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs.
The shoulder strap must be as far in on
the shoulder as possible.
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
• Anoutofpositionsafetybeltcanresult
in the wearer sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
• Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
Correct seating position
• Two people must never share one
safety belt. In the event of a crash
thosesharingabeltriskbeingcrushed
together and injured.
• Only one person per safety belt!
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
13
To fasten the belt
Press the red button to release the belt
The belt guide on door pillar
The belt must be as far in ontheshoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
The front safety belts have their lower
anchorage points on the seats. The safety
belts follow the seats when the legroom is
adjusted.
Refer to page 217 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
Front safety belts
Belt height adjustment
The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
safety belts can be set at different heights.
Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as pos-
sible without rubbing against the neck. To
avoid chafing in the case of a short person,
the guide can be lowered until the belt
comes about an inch (a few centimetres)
from the throat but still provides safe
restraint.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Raise the belt guide by pushing it upwards
to the desired position. To lower it, depress
the catch release button while lowering the
guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Safety
The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.
Thepretensionersareactivatedintheevent
of a violent frontal or side-on crash. The
pretensionersareonlyactivatedifthesafety
belt in question is in use.
Safety belt pretensioners
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
necessary.
The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-
vated if the car rolls over.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the forward movement of the body
by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken-
ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi-
ble.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
15
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 116).
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat,
it must be properly secured with the
safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Rear safety belts
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
Safety belts, rear seat
The three rear seats all have three-point
safety belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
youandinsertingthetongueintothebuckle.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Securing an item on the rear seat
See page 217 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far in ontheshoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Safety
Seats
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Manually adjusted front seats
The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
• Height (driver’s seat)
• Legroom
Height adjustment, driver’s seat
Legroom adjustment
• Backrest rake angle
• Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
• Head-restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-
tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will
increase the height in steps.
Press down the lever to lower the seat.
Repeated downward presses of the lever
will lower the seat in steps.
Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
slide the seat to the desired position.
WARNING
Check that the seat is locked in the new
position. If not, it may move while the car
is being driven and it could result in injury
to the occupant in the event of a crash.
1 Height
2 Legroom
3 Backrest rake angle
4 Head restraint height
Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
wheel (see page 98).
Electrically adjustable front seats
See page 18.
Electric heating, front seats (option)
See pages 83 and 92.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
17
Backrest rake angle
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end collision.
To find the most comfortable position, turn
the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
the backrest.
Adjusting the backrest
Lumbar support
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbarsupportby
turning the knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Safety
Electrically adjustable front seats
(option)
WARNING
• The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-
ing the seat, and make sure that noth-
inggets caughtand damaged. Ensure
thatnothingcanbetrappedbehindthe
seat when adjusting it.
• Bear in mind that children can be
injured if they play with the electrically-
operated seats.
Height adjustment and seat angle
Legroom adjustment
• Always remove the remote control
when you leave the car to prevent
personal injury caused by the electri-
cally adjustable seats, for example,
due to children playing.
Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
section of the front lever.
Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
section of the front lever.
Adjust the legroom with the front lever.
With the doors closed the seats can only be
adjusted when the ignition is ON.
However, there are two exceptions:
• Tofacilitategettingintothecar, bothseats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
• The seats can be adjusted up to
20 seconds after both doors have been
closed (applicable only to cars without
window and sunroof pinch protection).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
19
Backrest rake angle
WARNING
Lumbar support, driver’s seat
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbar support by
turning the knob.
Memory function (option)
The legroom of the driver’s seat with
memory can always be adjusted, irrespec-
tive of whether or not one of the front doors
is open. Nor does the position of the ignition
switch make any difference. If the ignition is
ON, all adjustments can be made. When a
front door is open, all seat settings can be
adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end collision.
The memory also includes the door mirror
settings.
Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
the rear lever.
Storing and restoring settings
1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The lumbar support is not included by
the memory function.
2 Press and hold the M-button and then
press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
the settings have been saved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety
To recall programmed settings, press and
hold the desired memory button while the
seat and door mirrors adopt their
Head restraints
programmed positions. The memory func-
tion also includes the door mirror settings.
WARNING
To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
door mirror can be angled down, refer to
page 110.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
Active Head Restraints (SAHRs). These
reduce the risk of neck injury if the car is hit
from behind.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraintforward and upward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-
end crash.
The front and rear head restraints can be
raised andloweredto anumber of positions.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be lowered
fully to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
21
Protect your children from getting
trapped in the trunk of a car
Child safety
WARNING
• Never leave your children unattended
in a car, even for a short time.
– Children can suffer heat stroke,
perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
WARNING
WARNING
• Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
• Teach your children not to play in or
around cars.
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
• Watch your children when loading or
unloading the car so they don´t get
locked in by mistake.
• At gas stations, take the remote
control from the car while filling the
tank.
•Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by the airbag
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
or under motor vehicles.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• Keeptherearfold-downseatclosedto
help prevent children from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
• Always look for children before back-
ing your motor vehicle out of a garage
or driveway.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in the garage.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in
seconds in less than an inch of water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing
restraints for children 3 and under.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child restraint instructions.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Lower anchorages (ISOFIX) in the rear seat
symbol. The lower anchorages are located
where theseat cushion andseat back come
together. There is a label above the inner
lower anchorage, see picture above. Label
consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
a seat inside a circle.
Saab recommends rearward facing
restraints for children 3 and under.
Ifyou haveany questions regardingLATCH
please contact your Saab dealer.
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan-
dard for a uniform method of fitting child
restraints without using the standard safety
belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
The LATCH system is installed in the car to
facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
designed for and equipped with LATCH
attachments.
The LATCH system consists of top tether
andloweranchorages(alsocalledISOFIX).
In this vehicle, LATCH is installed at the two
outboard seating positions in the rear seat,
and there is a top tether on the rear center
position. The top tethers are located on top
of the parcel shelf, see page 24. They are
covered by a lid with a child seat anchor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
23
LATCH child seat installation
7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorage
bars and the top tether strap.
Only use the belt supplied with the child
restraint.
For the top tether, only use the strap sup-
plied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints is
limited.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Before starting the installation, please read
through this instruction, and the child seat
installation instruction.
1 Place the child restraint on one of the
designated outboard rear seat cush-
ions.
2 Slide the attachment on the child
restraint in between the seat cushion
and backrest.
3 Press the child restraint down on the
seat, 1 in illustration.
4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
up the inner restraint attachment arm
with the label, 2 in illustration.
Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
tether
5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint attachment
arms are properly attached to the bars.
Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
top tether
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Safety
Child tether anchorages for forward
facing child seats
WARNING
Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages.Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the child restraint and attach the restraint as
follows:
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint, 1 in illustration.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
described in the child restraint installa-
tion instruction.
4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
illustration.
6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
in illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
25
Iffittingachildrestraintthatisintendedtobe
secured in position by the standard safety
belt, make use of the locking function of the
belt.
Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
seat will work loose while the car is in
motion.
The safety belt locking function will be deac-
tivated when the safety belt is retracted.
Installation of child restraint using
the standard safety belt
1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
buckle.
2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
restraint, accordning to the instructions
from the child restraint manufacturer.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child
restraint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.
1 Position the child restraint in the back
seat.
2 Route the belt in the restraint according
to the installation instruction of the
restraint.
3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
Clicking sound indicates that the lock
function is in work.
4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
child restraint in position.
3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-
ing sound ceases.
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Saab recommends rearward facing
restraints for children 3 and under.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the belt. The belt must not
unreel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Safety
If the force of the impact is small, the airbag
needs only to inflate to Stage I to provide
optimum protection. If the seat is positioned
far forward (the person occupying the seat
is fairly short), only Stage I is activated to
prevent injury caused by the airbag being
inflated with full force.
If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
impact, Stage II will be activated later. This
occurs when the airbag is already fully
inflated and thus does not affect the person
occupying the seat. Stage II is activated
here to render the gas generator harmless
(its activation is not noticeable to the occu-
pant).
Airbag system components
Airbag
• Airbag in steering wheel
• Airbag in instrument panel in front of
passenger seat
• Side airbags in front seat backrests
• Inflatablecurtainsalonglengthofheadlin-
ing (from front to rear roof pillars)
WARNING
• Safety belt pretensioners for front seats.
To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
The airbag system supplements the protec-
tion provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of occupants taller than
55 in. (140 cm).
Whenthesystemisactivatedatthemoment
of impact, the airbag inflates and then
deflates through holes in the back. The
whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
quicker than the blink of an eye.
The steering wheel and passenger airbags
are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
passenger airbag system compensates for
safety belt usage, the force of the crash and
the position of the seats at the moment of
impact.
• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls
comfortably.
• Passengers 12 and under or shorter
than 55 inches (140 cm) must always
travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted
with a passenger airbag.
• Never fit a child seat in front of the
passenger airbag.
• Stage I is activated if the force of the
impact is low or if the seat is close to the
steering wheel or fascia.
• Stage II is activated in all other cases.
Note:
The sensor reacts differently depending on
whether or not the front safety belts on the
driver’s and passenger sides are used. Sit-
uations can therefore arise where only one
of the airbags inflates.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
27
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alenttoahigh-speedcrash(airbagsinflated
to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
be activated (see page 32).
If the airbags are deployed, the positive
terminal of the battery will be disconnected,
See page 184.
If a fault arises in the airbag system during
a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
main instrument panel will come on and the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Inflated airbag (driver’s side).
Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
approx. 0.1 s
Both front airbags inflated
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
The driver and passenger front airbags are
triggered by violent front-end crashs. They
are not activated by minor front-end
impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
side-impacts.
There are two impact sensors on the front
bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
soon after the moment of impact, these
register that the car is involved in a crash.
Using this information and data from the
central sensor in the control module, the
controlmoduledetermineswhetherornotto
inflate the airbags. The control module also
controls whether other components of the
airbag system are to be deployed: safety
belt pretensioners, side airbags and inflat-
able curtains.
Which airbag system components are
deployed depends on a number of factors,
such as the force of the crash and the angle
of impact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Safety
Airbag system
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
1 Steering wheel with integral airbag
2 Side airbag
3 Sensor, side airbags and inflatable curtains
4 Sensor, side airbags and inflatable curtains
5 Electronic control module and central sensor
6 Sensor, side airbags and inflatable curtains
7 Side airbag
8 Sensor, side airbags and inflatable curtains
9 Inflatable curtain
10 Passenger airbag
11 Inflatable curtain
12 Sensors in front bumper
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
29
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for
instance.
• If the airbag warning light
remains
WARNING
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately by an
authorized Saab dealer. The warning
light could signify that the airbags may
not inflate in a crash, or they could
eveninflatewithoutacrash. Seepage
57.
• Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
• Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as
possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat
least 20 minutes.
• Always sit with the whole of your back
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Safety
Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
a front-end crash
Front passenger seat
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
Moment of impact.
•Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
WARNING
(140 cm) can be killed by the airbag
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
apassengerairbag. Inflationoftheairbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
Sensors detect a
decelleration and send
a signal via the control
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the
airbag.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
The system is the same as that used on the
driver’s side.
The airbag systems are interconnected and
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
have a common warning light
. The pas-
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
senger airbag module is housed in the
fascia above the glove compartment and is
marked "AIRBAG".
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
• The glove compartment must be
closed while travelling. An open glove
compartment door could cause leg
injuries in the event of a crash.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
• Neverplaceanything onthedashorin
frontoftheseatas, in additiontobeing
a hazard to passengers, this could
interferewiththe function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
appliestothemountingofaccessories
on the dash.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
31
The side airbags, which protect the upper
body, are integrated in the outside edges of
the front seat backrests.
The front seats have safety belt pretension-
ers.
Side airbags
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the dash, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
There are two sensors on each side of the
car, one at the rear of each door sill. The
side-impact protection is only activated on
the side of impact, while the safety belt pre-
tensioners on both sides are deployed.
WARNING
Head protection
The pillar trim and headlining are designed
to absorb energy, softening possible blows
to the head. After a crash, these items must
be changed in the seat positions that were
occupied. Never fit accessories to the pillar
trim or headlining as these could reduce the
effectiveness of the head protection and
inflatable curtain.
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra seat cover should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
• Never placeany objectinthe areathat
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
theseat, withyoursafety beltcorrectly
fastened.
• Theside-impactprotectionwillonly be
activated in the event of a side-on
crash or high-speed frontal crash
(airbags inflated to Stage II), but not in
theeventofarear-endcrashorthecar
rolling over.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must immediately be repaired
by an authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Safety
The inflatable curtains, which protect the
head, are concealed along the lengths of
the headlining (all the way from front to rear
roof pillars).
Inflatable curtains
WARNING
The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
time as the side airbags in the front seats in
case of a side-on impact.
The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
into the window area between the front and
rear roof pillars.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
for the steering wheel and passenger
airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
deployed.
• Do not sit with your head rested
against the side window. The inflat-
able curtain is designed to inflate
between the window and the head.
Resting the head against the window
could prevent the inflatable curtain
from providing the intended
protection.
• Hang only light clothes from the hooks
ontherearseatcourtesyhandles.The
items of clothing must not contain
heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
wire coat hangers.
Inflated side airbag
• Do not position asun visor or similar in
the area that would be filled by the
inflatable curtain.
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the roof pillars
andheadliningincorporatecushioning
material. Do not attach anything to the
car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
panels as this could prevent the side-
impact protection from providing the
intended protection.
• Do not stack loads so high that they
could encumber the inflatable curtain
in the event of a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
33
Inflated inflatable curtain
Inflated inflatable curtain
Prohibited seating position
For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-
able curtain comes down from the headlin-
ing and covers a large portion of the side
windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Safety
Airbag warning lamp
Crash sensing
Servicing the airbag system
Crash sensing and diagnostic modules
have been used in automobiles since air-
bags were first produced. The technical
information gained from these modules can
be useful to understanding the circum-
stancesthatledtotheairbagdeployment.In
addition, informationfrommany fieldevents
can be used in the aggregate to help manu-
facturers and others better understand real
world crashes. This, in turn, can lead to
improved automotive safety.
The airbag system must be inspected as
part of the normal service program but oth-
erwise may be regarded as maintenance-
free.
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 57.
• The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
Your vehicle is equipped with two electronic
frontal sensors, which helps the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. Your vehicle is also equipped with a
crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal
airbag system. The module records infor-
mation about the readiness of the system,
whenthesystemcommandsairbaginflation
anddriver’ssafetybeltusageatdeployment
or in a near-deployment crash. The module
also records speed, engine rpm, brake and
throttle data etc.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
35
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult , before they
are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
crash.
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Scrapping or working on airbag and
belt pretensioners
Frequently asked questions on
function of the airbag
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-
bags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag system compo-
nents merely supplement the car’s normal
safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
willonlybeactuatedinamoderatetosevere
frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
of course, that they provide no protection in
minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side-
crashes or if the car rolls over.
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
• During any welding, both battery
cables must be disconnected and
covered.
The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
movement of the body in a crash.
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
• Beforequick dryingpaintinthevicinity
of the electronic control module, the
module’s grounding points and wiring
must be covered.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tancebetweenyouandtheairbag.Forshort
drivers, specialaccessorypedalextensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
• Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
must be deployed under controlled
conditions before the car is scrapped
oranyofthesystem’scomponentsare
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
• Airbag-system components must
neverbetransferredforuseinanother
vehicle.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must be carried out by autho-
rized personnel only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Safety
When do the airbags in the steering wheel
and passenger side of the dash board
inflate?
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof
the impacting object.
How loud is the inflation?
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is of an very short duration and will not
damage your hearing. For a short time after-
wards you could experience a buzzing
noise in your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
If the warning lightis on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
The airbag canonly beactivated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
Are the dust and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under or shorter
than55 inches (140 cn) can be killed by the
airbag.
The back seat is the safest place for chil-
dren.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.
Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of
the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos-
sible getting dust on your skin as there is a
risk of skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bringonanattack, in which case youshould
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
What won’t trigger the airbag?
The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
somethingrelativelysoftandyielding(e.g. a
snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a
low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-
sarily be triggered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
37
Security
Doors ________________
38
38
46
Central locking ________
Car alarm _____________
Manually opening the
fuel filler door ________
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Security
A key code number is supplied with your
car. This number needs to be quoted for
ordering a new traditional key (contained in
the remote control). Therefore, keep this
number in a safe place.
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked. If the code is
incorrect, the car will not start.
Doors
Central locking
Open the door by lifting the door handle.
The following message appears on the
Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
door has still not been closed):
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Close doors.
The car is supplied with two remote con-
trols. It is possible to have up to five remote
controls programmed for the car at any one
time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
obtained as soon as possible. Contact your
Saab dealer. When a new key is pro-
grammed into the car, the lost key will be
deprogrammed automatically.
Remote control
The remote control and ignition key are inte-
grated in one unit, and referred to in this
manual as the remote control.
The remote control contains a mechanical
key, referred to in this manual as the tradi-
tional key. This traditional key can be used
in an emergency to lock or unlock the
driver’s door from outside (see page 40).
This key does not fit the ignition switch.
Note:
If a new remote control has to be ordered
and programmed, at least one old one is
required for the locking system’s electronic
unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
control.
Once the new remote control has been pro-
grammed, the old unit that is lost will not
work. Therefore you should carry two
remote controls separately, especially on
long journeys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
39
Remote control functions
Button Pressed once
Pressed
twice
Hold and
NOTICE
press the
button >2 s
The remote control contains delicate
electronics.
Locks all doors,
fuel filler door and
trunk lid.
Comfort
closing, see
page 100.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
Unlocks driver´s The other
door and fuel filler doors are
door.
Comfort
opening, see
page 99.
unlocked
• Do not place the remote control where
it may be subjected to high tempera-
tures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
and the trunk
lid switch is
enabled.
Unlocks and
slightly opens
trunk lid.
Checks number
of remote con-
trols, see page
43.
• Warm the remote control in your
hands for a couple of minutes if it has
become very cold to prevent malfunc-
tion.
Remote control
1 Locks car
2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
Activates panic function
• For details on changing the battery,
refer to page 44.
Turns on exterior
and cabin lighting
*) (for 30 s) or
turns off lighting
and deactivates
panic alarm.
Panic alarm
(activates
alarm manu-
ally), see
page 49.
*) parking lights, side direction indicators,
tail lights and license plate lighting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Security
Remote unlocking
Locking/unlocking the car
Pressing the
button once: the driver´s
door and the fuel filler door is unlocked.
Press asecondtimetounlock therest ofthe
doors and enable the trunk lid switch.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
confirm.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
If a fault arises in the locking system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Never lock anyone in the car.
Lock system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Remote locking and unlocking also control
the car alarm.
Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
Remote locking
with the traditional key
Saab Information Display (SID), see page
64.
Intermittent malfunctioning
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Press the
button once: all doors and
the trunk lid locked.
Equipment in thevicinity of the car that uses
the same frequency as the remote control
may cause interference to the remote con-
trol signal. In this case, retry from another
angle and aim at the receiver located by the
steering wheel.
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
confirm.
The car will be locked automatically
3 minutes after it is unlocked unless a door
or the trunk lid is opened.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
1 Remove the traditional key from the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse of the remote control.
(This key only fits the front left-hand
door.)
2 Carefully remove the cover plate from
the keyhole in the door.
3 Unlock the door with the key.
The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-
tion switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
41
Locking a car with dead battery
Trunk lid
Opening
The trunk lid is unlock and slightly opened
The steering wheel lock requires sufficient
battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the bat-
tery voltage drops below a certain level
while the remote control is in the ignition
switch, you will not be able to remove the
remote control.
when the button on the remote control
or driver’s door is pressed once.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm.
The movement sensor in the cabin will be
disarmed.
If you must leave the car, proceed as
follows:
1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock
buttons on the doors.
2 Lock the front left door from outside with
the traditional key (see page 40). The
car is now locked but the car alarm will
remain inactive.
Closing
The trunk lid is locked when closed.
If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
closeditisarmedandthemovementsensor
in the cabin will be armed.
Opening button on driver’s door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Security
maticallyafter20 minutes. Thisistoprevent
the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
has electrically adjustable seats, these will
cease to operate.
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are activated by means of
a catch next to the door latch.
Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
(enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
45° in the direction shown on the label on
the door.
When the child safety lock is in the locked
position, the door can only be opened from
outside the car.
Central locking switch
Child safety locks
Switches on front doors
WARNING
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car using the button by each
front door handle.
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
• Locking the car with the remote control
renders these buttons inoperative.
• If you are sitting in the car and press the
button on the driver’s door, this will unlock
the driver’s door and fuel filler door. Press
the button a second time to unlock the
remaining doors and the trunk lid. The
buttononthepassengerdoorworksinthe
samewayexceptthatthisfirstunlocksthe
passenger door and fuel filler flap. In this
mode, the other doors cannot be opened
from outside the car.
If the car is left withoneor more doors open,
the interior lighting will be switched off auto-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
43
Trunk Release Handle
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be
reprogrammed at a Saab dealer (see page
248).
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
Checking the number of remote
controls
Tocheckthenumberofremotecontrolsthat
are programmed for the car:
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it
1 Inserttheremotecontrolintotheignition
switch and turn it to ON.
2 Press the
control.
button on the remote
Trunk Release Handle
3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
now display the number of remote
controls that are programmed for your
car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
ignition switch.
Example of SID message:
X: standard key
Y: valet key
Key No: Z
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Security
When the voltage of the remote control
battery drops below a certain level, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Changing the key battery
WARNING
Remote control battery low.
Replace battery.
Keep the battery and other small compo-
nents of theremote control out of reach of
children.
Change the battery as soon as possible to
avoid malfunctioning.
Battery type: Panasonic CR2032,
3V Lithium.
NOTICE
The electronics of the remote control are
sensitiveto electrostatic discharge. Incor-
rect handling when changing the battery
can damage the remote control. Avoid
touching electronic components of the
remote control with your hands.
The battery should last for about 4 years of
normal use.
The battery type is marked on the inside of
the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-
prints on the faces of the battery.
Press the emblem to remove
the traditional key
1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
remote control to remove the traditional
key.
2 Insertthetipof the key intothesmall slot
and turn the key to split the remote
control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
45
After changing the battery you must
synchronize the remote control with the
car’sreceiverunitsothatthecarrecognizes
it. Synchronization takes place when the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch for the first time after a battery
change.
If the battery has been changed outside the
car and the car is locked, proceed as fol-
lows:
Immobilizer
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked and the LED
double-flashes for 3 seconds. If the code is
correct, the car can be started.
Each time you remove the remote control
from the ignition, the electronic starting
interlock is activated, the LED double-
flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
immobilized.Ifanincorrectremotecontrolis
now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
the remote control of another car), the
immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-
ble to start the car.
1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi-
tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
will be tripped.
2 Open the door and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch. If the car
has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
The remote control and receiver unit are
now synchronized.
Change the battery and fit together
the two halves of the remote control
If the immobilizer system malfunctions, the
Saab Information Display (SID) displays:
3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
so that it is positioned in the same way
as the old battery.
4 Fit together the two halves of the remote
control and press them together until
you hear a click. Reinsert the traditional
key into the remote control.
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Security
If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
there is a problem checking the electronic
code of the remote control, the following
message will appear on the SID:
Thealarmisarmed11 secondsafterthecar
has been locked by remote control.
During the delay period, the LED shines
constantly. It will then start to flash once
every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
fascia.
If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
is locked with the remote control, the LED
will flash 3 times per second for
11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
and trunk lid are closed.
Car alarm
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Key not accepted.
Contact Saab dealer.
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
to have the problem checked and rectified.
If you unlock the trunk lid from outside the
The car alarm is armed when the car is
locked with the remote control.
The car alarm will not be armed if you
lock the car with the traditional key (see
page 40).
All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
monitored by the alarm. A movement
sensor triggers the alarm if movement is
detected in the cabin, such as if someone
sticks in their arm through a smashed
window.
car with the
button on the remote con-
trol, you must lock the car with the
button to arm the car alarm.
All the windows should be shut when the
alarm is armed. Otherwise, the movement
sensor may interpret a passer-by as an
attempted break-in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
47
Toavoidanyinconvenience,makesurethat
anyoneusingthecar is familiar withhow the
car alarm and the locking system work.
If the alarm has been tripped since the car
was last locked, the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID) will display:
Switching off the alarm if tripped
What trips the alarm?
The alarm will be tripped if:
If the alarm has been triggered (direction
indicatorsflashingandhornsounding)itcan
be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
below).
• a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
• the movement sensor registers move-
ment in the cabin
• somebody tries to hotwire the car
• the car battery is disconnected.
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks car.
Signals when the alarm is tripped
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
Turns off lights and horn.
Car remains locked.
If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks trunk.
• all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
• the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
The signals can vary between markets
and due to legal and insurance require-
ments.
Theft protection failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Turns off lights and horn.
Turns on exterior and cabin light-
ing. Car remains locked.
Arming the car alarm
If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
control to ON in the ignition switch
Thealarmisarmedwhenalldoors,thehood
and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
car with the remote control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Security
Disabling the movement and tilt sensors
Movement sensor
NOTICE
If, for example, you leave a dog in the car or
park on a ferry, you should disable the sen-
sors as described below:
The movement sensor monitors the cabin.
The alarm will be triggered if a movement is
detected, such as if someone sticks in their
arm through a smashed window.
Note: Always contact your Saab dealer if
youintendtouseaseparatecabinheateras
this can interfere with the movement
sensor.
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
timeunlock the car, ifthebutton on the
key is pressed by mistake when the
car is still within its range. The car will
be locked automatically after
1 Go to Profiler by pressing the CUSTOM-
IZE button (see also 64).
2 Turn the INFO dial until Theft Alarm is
selected.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Door alarm only.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
3 minutes.
• When locking the car by remote
control in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking
buttons are all down.
Theft Alarm
Full theft alarm
Door alarm only
If not, unlock and relock the car again.
The movement and tilt sensors will be reac-
tivated automatically the next time you start
the car. You can activate the sensors man-
ually before the engine is started as
described above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
49
The functions of Full theft alarm and Door
alarm only modes are explained below.
Panic function
The car alarm includes a panic function.
This function allows the alarm to be started
manually, for example, to attract attention.
Full theft alarm:
The panic alarm can only be activated while
the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if
the car is driven off.
When the alarm is tripped, the lights and
horn come on for 3 minutes or until you
press one of the remote control buttons.
The alarm will be triggered if a window
issmashedandsomeonesticksintheir
arm to take something from the car. All
windows and the sunroof should be
shut when the car is locked in Full theft
alarm mode.
To start the alarm manually proceed as
follows:
Door alarm only:
In this mode, the movement and tilt
sensors are disabled. This can be use-
ful if you wish to leave a dog in the car
or are travelling by ferry, for example.
• Press and hold the
button on the
remote control for more than 2 seconds,
or if you are sitting in the car...
• Press and hold the
or
button on
one of the front doors for more than
2 seconds.
To switch off the alarm:
• Press one of the remote control buttons
or, if you are sitting in the car, the
buttons on one of the front doors.
or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Security
Overview of functions
Locking/arming Direction indicators flash once.
Movement
sensor
The movement sensor trips the alarm if it regis-
ters a movement in the cabin.
Unlocking/
disarming
Hazard warning lights flash twice.
Remote control Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
In favorable conditions the range can be signif-
icantly greater.
Unlocking/
disarming trunk
lid
Hazard warning lights flash three times.
Remote control Normal life: approx. 4 years.
battery
Change the battery when the SID displays:
Remote control battery low. Replace battery.
See Changing the key battery, page 44.
Alarm triggered Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
press one of the remote control buttons or turn
the remote control ON in the ignition switch.
Car battery
The alarm will trip if the battery is disconnected
when the alarm is armed.
Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
page 248.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
51
Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display (SID)
messages
SID message
Reason/action
Activity
LED signal
Key not accepted.
Error when remote control
inserted into ignition switch.
Contact Saab dealer.
Arming (delay period)
Alarm armed
Disarming
Shines for 11 s.
Remote control battery low.
Replace battery.
Battery needs replacing.
See page 44.
Flashes once every 3 s.
Off.
Off.
X: standard key
Y: valet key
Key No: Z
Check of the number of remote
controls programmed for your
car. See page 43.
Alarm not armed
A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes
open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.
period.
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
The alarm has been tripped
since the car was last locked.
Car immobilized but not locked. Off.
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Error when immobilizer code
checked.
Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.
system, valid remote control
inserted or removed from ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Security
Manually opening the
fuel filler door
If the fuel filler door, which is controlled by
the central locking system, does not unlock,
proceed as described below.
Check fuse 7 in the fuse panel at the end of
the fascia (see page 201). If this fuse has
blown or the new fuse blows, the fuel filler
door can be opened as follows:
1 Openthehatchonthe right-hand side of
the trunk.
2 Loosen the two screws (do not unscrew
them fully). Lift up the screws and press
them out of their keys.
Lock motor for fuel filler door
The fuel filler door can now be opened as
usual.
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
53
Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator
lights _______________
54
59
Instruments ___________
Information display,
main instrument panel_
62
Saab Information Display
(SID)________________
64
72
76
Switches _____________
Wipers and washers ____
Manual climate-control
system______________
79
84
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)__
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Instruments and controls
Main instrument panel
Warning and indicator
lights
The following warning and indicate lights
are found on the main instrument panel.
Antilock braking warning
This warning light illuminates when a fault
arises in the antilock brake system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
2 Speedometer
3 Turbo gauge
4 Fuel gauge
5 Engine temperature gauge
6 Information display
7 Trip meter reset button
The brake system will continue to function
but without ABS modulation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
55
This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
or ignition system. The car may still be
driven with care but the performance of the
engine will be somewhat diminished (see
page 125).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
This light will come on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low. If thewarning light flashes or
comes on while you are driving, stop imme-
diately in a safe place, switch off the engine
and check the oil level (see page 176).
WARNING
An illuminated “Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Never drive the car when the oil pressure
warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
cause serious engine damage.
NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
faults from arising.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Turn off engine.
High beam Indicator
This light shows when the high beam is on
(see page 72).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
Instruments and controls
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 180).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelis stillnormal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest Saab dealer to have the
brake system checked.
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-
utes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s load.
Front fog lights
Brake warning light
This light indicates when the front fog lights
are on (see page 74).
The front fog lights are switched off auto-
matically when the engine is switched off.
When the fog lights are next needed, they
will have to be switched on manually.
This light should come on briefly when you
turntheignitionkey toON. Ifitdoesn´tcome
on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem. This light indicates
when the brake fluid level is too low (see
page 180).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Rear fog light Indicator
This light indicates when the rear fog light is
on (see page 74).
The rear fog light is switched off automati-
cally when the engine is switched off. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
If a fault arises in the EBD function, the
,
and lights willcomeon. Also, thefol-
lowing message will appear on the Saab
Information Display (SID):
WARNING
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
• Never drive the car if these two lights
are on at the same time. Danger of
brake failure!
Ifthis isthecase, drivecarefully andcontact
a Saab dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
Brake warning light on page 56, Antilock
braking warning on page 54 and TCS OFF
or ESP OFF indicator (certain variants only)
on page 63.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir isbelow theMINmark, thevehicle
should be transported on a recovery
vehicle.
• Have the brake system checked
immediately at a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
57
WARNING
Seatbelt reminder
Airbag warning light
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
This light reminds the driver to buckle up.
This light comes on if a potentially serious
fault has occured in the airbag system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Parking brake warning
light
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
This light comes on when the parking brake
is applied (see page 148).
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
WARNING
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 148.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the remote control.
This light will come on for about three sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.
• Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
Instruments and controls
Cruise control indicator
light
Indicator, fuel
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
tank.
This light comes on when the system is
engaged.
Shift-up
(US-spec. cars only)
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
This symbol can be found in cars with
manual transmission. The symbol is not
activated until the engine is warm.
It is not always necessary or even recom-
mended to shift up to a higher gear when
this symbol lights up, such as when driving
in heavy traffic or down a steep hill.
Changing up a gear when the symbol
comes on does however improve fuel econ-
omy. Make it a habit to shift up when the
symbol lights up.
Autochecking of lights, main
instrument panel
Headlight and parking
light indicator
The warning and indicator lights shown
above should come on when the ignition
switch is turned to ON. They should go out
after about 4 seconds once the engine has
started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
of each system or function.
This light indicates that the headlights or
parking lights are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
59
Reset button
The reset button is positioned immediately
to the left of the speedometer.
• Ignition ON:
Press once – resets the trip meter.
• Ignition OFF:
Cars with manual transmission
Press once – enables you to read the
odometer and trip meter.
Press twice – resets the trip meter.
Cars with automatic transmission
Instruments
Tachometer
Odometer and trip meter
The tachometer displays the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
A protective function (interruption of the fuel
supply) limits the engine speed within the
red zone.
The odometer records the distance trav-
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
on Canadian vehicles).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
Instruments and controls
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-
able place and allow the engine to idle. If
theneedlecontinuestorise, switchoffthe
engine.
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,
stopthecar assoonas itis safetodosoand
check the coolant level (see page 179).
WARNING
Speedometer (U.S. speedometer
shown)
The speedometer displays the speed of the
car in miles per hour (mph). It receives infor-
mation about vehicle speed from the ABS’s
wheel sensors.
Temperature gauge
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cooling-
system can cause hot coolant and steam
to be released. Failure to heed this warn-
ing may result in personal injury.
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle goes into the red zone (which
can occur at high outside air temperatures
or under heavy engine loads), choose the
highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
61
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
limiting the boost pressure, you should
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
When the speed of the car exceeds
143 mph (230 km/h), acceleration is limited
by reducing the boost pressure. The pres-
sure gauge then moves towards the middle
of the white field, indicating a drop in engine
power and consequently the car’s speed.
Turbo gauge
Fuel gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
used for combustion, which is equivalent to
the engine load.
When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
the main instrument panel comes on.
Atlowloadsandwhentheengineisusedfor
braking, the needle will move within the
white zone.
Refueling, see page 128.
Under certain barometric conditions the
needle may enter the first part of the red
zone without necessarily indicating that a
fault has arisen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
Instruments and controls
Cars with automatic transmission:
Information display,
Information symbol.
Read information on SID
main instrument panel
Under the speedometer is a display. The
information shown here varies depending
on whether the car has a manual transmis-
sion or automatic transmission.
This symbol comes on when a message or
warning is displayed on the Saab Informa-
tion Display (SID).
• Theodometerandtripmeterreadingsare
shown on the left-hand side of the display.
• Various information and faults are
displayed in the center of the display.
• The selected gear position is shown on
the right-hand side of the display.
Cars with manual transmission:
Gear selector indicator
(cars with automatic trans-
mission)
Thecurrentgearpositionisdisplayedonthe
right-hand side of the information display.
When gears are selected manually, the
letter M (manual) and the selected gear are
displayed (see page 139).
• The odometer reading is shown on the
left-hand side of the display.
• Various information and faults are
displayed in the center of the display.
• The trip meter reading is shown on the
right-hand side of the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
63
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
TCS or
ESP indicator
(certain variants only)
TCS OFF or
ESP OFF indicator (certain
variants only)
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
WARNING
WARNING
or
The system improves ride comfort and
safety during normal driving. It must
however not be regarded as a system
to enable the driver to maintain higher
speeds. The same precautions as
normal for safe cornering and driving
on slippery roads must be adopted (see
pages 144/ 146).
The system improves ride comfort and
safety during normal driving. It must
however not be regarded as a system
to enable the driver to maintain higher
speeds. The same precautions as
normal for safe cornering and driving
on slippery roads must be adopted (see
pages 144/ 146).
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
If so, have the system checked at a Saab
dealer.
See also Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 144 andElectronic Stability Program
(ESP) on page 146.
This symbol lights up when the system is
operative.
Operation of the TCS or ESP indicates
reducedcohesion between the tires andthe
road, and that extra careshouldbe taken by
the driver.
This symbol lights up when the system is
disengaged using the TCS/ESP button.
If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
be turned off by pressing the TCS/ESP
button.
The car is equipped as standard with TCS
and ESP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
Instruments and controls
The number of systems that are displayed
on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
level. The list shown below includes the
systems that can be found in your car.
Saab Information
Display (SID)
Various types of information are shown on
the SID: warnings, indications, trip com-
puter information and information from the
car’s Infotainment System.
Theft Alarm, page 46.
Full theft alarm
Door alarm only
Park Assistance, page 152.
SPA on
The warnings and indications that can be
shown on the SID are listed on page 249.
When the engine is switched off, the current
warnings and indications are displayed.
If there is more than one message on the
SID, a plus sign will be displayed to the left
of the first message. Each message will be
displayed for 10 seconds.
Press the CLEAR button to acknowledge
a SID message. If you acknowledge a mes-
sage but do nothing about it, the message
will be displayed again the next time you
start the car.
You can adjust the settings of several of the
car’s systems, such as the clock, alarm and
climatecontrolsystem. Theseareknownas
Profiler.
SPA off
SID, control unit and display
Clock / Alarm, page 69.
Set Clock
Profiler
Set Alarm
Adjustments can be made with the control
unit situated between the main instrument
panel and the audio system. This is called
Profiler.
Rain Sensor, page 77.
High
Medium
1 Activate Profiler by pressing the
CUSTOMIZE button.
2 Turn the INFO dial until the appropriate
system is selected.
Low
3 Confirm selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
SelectExit onceyou have made the desired
settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
65
Whentheengineisstarted, thefunctionthat
was selected when the engine was
switched off is displayed, with the following
exceptions:
Trip computer function of the SID
WARNING
Climate System, page 93.
Rear Defroster
Heated Seats
• Temp is displayed if the outside temper-
ature is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C).
• D.T.E is displayed if less than or equal to
30 miles (50 km).
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
Fan Settings
Air Distribution
A/C Mode
Dual/Single Zone
Default Settings
Language
Outdoor temperature
The Temp function is always activated
(even in Night Panel mode) if the outdoor
temperaturerisesor falls to between 26 and
38°F (–3 and +3°C).
SID contains the following functions:
Temp
D.T.E.
Outdoor temperature
Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank)
Unit
WARNING
Average fuel consumption
since function last reset
Speed Scale Illum.
Service Info
Fuel Ø
Date
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
Date
Distance to destinations.
Function can also be used as
a trip meter
Dist
Arriv
Estimated time of arrival
Average speed since func-
tion last reset
Speed Ø
Speed W Speed warning (chime)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
Instruments and controls
Setting values
Resetting a single function
Speed warning
This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
The value can be set to between 0 and
150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).
1 Select one of the functions using the
INFO dial.
• Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
• Dist(presetto100miles(100 km)ifnot
previously set)
• Speed Ø
• Arriv
1 Selectthefunctionyouwishtoresetwith
the INFO dial.
• Fuel Ø
• Speed Ø
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
1 Select Speed W using the INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
approx. 1 second.
3 Adjust the speed using the INFO dial.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the
INFO dial.
A star on the right-hand side of the display
indicates when the speed warning function
is active.
An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
is exceeded.
Disengage the function with the CLEAR
button. Re-engage the function using
the INFO dial.
• Date
The selected function will now be reset.
Resetting the trip computer
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
(Press CLEAR to reset the value.)
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
Using DIST as a trip meter
1 Select one of the functions using the
INFO dial.
• Fuel Ø
• Speed Ø
• D.T.E.
1 Select Dist using the INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
approx. 1 second.
An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
side of the display, indicating that the trip
meter is running.
• Arriv
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button
(approx. 3 seconds) until audible confir-
mation is given.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
67
Calculating the arrival time
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive?)
This functionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
To calculate the arrival time, the distance
must first be given.
Similarly, you can check the distance left by
Calculating the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive and know what my average speed will
be?)
Thisfunctionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
First, set the distance under Dist.
selecting Dist.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, Dist will function as a
trip meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter).
The starting value for the trip meter will be
the last distance set for the Dist function.
Example: The Dist function is set to
100 miles. After the count-down has
reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
beginning at 100 miles.
1 Select the Dist function using the
INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Set the distance to the destination using
the INFO dial.
1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
Speed Ø function.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
average speed.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
Select Arriv during the journey to display
the arrivaltime basedontheaverage speed
since Dist was set. If you take a break, this
time will be added to the previously calcu-
lated arrival time.
The time of arrival is updated during the
journey based on the average speed since
Dist was set. The speed of the car must
exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
By selecting Dist during the journey, you
can see how much distance is left to travel.
When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
meter.Thetipmeterstartsfromthedistance
that was set previously.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
Instruments and controls
Calculating the requisite average speed
Setting the date
Night Panel
(What average speed do I need to maintain
to get to my destination in time?)
This functionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
To calculate the requisite average speed,
the distance must first be given.
First, set the distance under Dist.
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
WhentheNIGHTPANELbuttonispressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated.
All other instrument lighting will be switched
off and the needles drop to zero.
1 Select the Date function using the
INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the year.
4 Press the INFO dial.
5 Turn the INFO dial to set the month.
6 Press the INFO dial.
7 Turn the INFO dial to set the day.
1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
Arriv function.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
time of arrival.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
The average speed (Speed Ø) will be
shown for 10 seconds.
This average speed will be updated during
the journey.
8 Confirm the setting by pressing the
INFO dial.
Note: All indicator and warning lights and
messages will operate normally if required.
Temp (when the outside temperature falls
or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
(50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
Panel model.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
69
Under Profiler you can choose whether the
entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph) or
only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should be
illuminated in Night Panel mode.
Explanation of setting the clock.
Clock
Settings can be made from Profiler.
Set Clock
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFOdial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Set Clock.
Manual:
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select System Settings using the INFO
dial.
Use the INFO dial to set
manually.
5 Select Manual.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Speed Scale Illum.
Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
Clock / Alarm
Set Clock
Manual
System Settings
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
Clock
0–90 mph
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
Instruments and controls
Explanation of setting the alarm time.
Alarm
System Settings
Settings can be made from Profiler.
Under this heading you can make system
settings, such as change the display lan-
guage, units and service information.
Set Alarm
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
Set Alarm:
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select System Settings using the
INFO dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select the desired heading using the
INFO dial.
2 Select Clock/Alarmusingthe INFO dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Set Alarm.
Ifthealarmisnotactivated:setusingthe
INFO dial.
If the alarm is activated (Set Alarm on):
select Alarm on or Alarm off.
A new alarm time can be set.
Use the INFO dial.
Set Alarm on:
A preset alarm time exists.
Select Alarm on or Alarm off.
5 Press in the INFO dial.
Clock / Alarm
Set Alarm
Alarm
00:00
Set Alarm on
Alarm on
Alarm off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
71
Explanation of the various selections under
System Settings.
Service Info
Service Data
Time for service? No.
System Settings
Language
(The number of languages can vary
between markets.)
Language
Select the desired language. The num-
ber of languages can vary between
markets.
Oil quality: xxx %.
xxxx days to service.
English
French
Time for service? Yes.
Service Data
Unit
German
Italian
Select the desired group of units.
Speed Scale Illum.
Oil quality: xxx %.
xxxx days to service.
Spanish
Swedish
Unit
Select the proportion of the speedo-
meter to be illuminated in Night Panel
mode.
Service Type
Time for intermediate
service.
Service Info
Metric
Time for main and
intermediate service.
Service Data:
Imperial
US
Theapproximateconditionoftheoil
is shown here. 100% is equivalent
to new engine oil.
Time for main service
Reset Service Ind.
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph
Service Type:
Are you sure?
Yes No
The type of service that is required
is shown here.
Reset Service Ind.:
The service indicator can be reset
here. This is normally done at the
dealer in connection with a service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Instruments and controls
Switches
Lights off
The car’s exterior lights are off.
The headlights can be flashed.
Parking lights
The parking lights can be turned on irre-
spective of the position of the ignition
switch. If the parking lights are on and the
driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
them off will sound.
Light switches
Dipswitch
1 Headlight flasher
2 High/low beam
Do not use the parking lights alone while
driving.
The parking lights may be used in combina-
tion with the front fog lights (see page 74).
Headlights
High/low beam
Low beam headlights are turned on when
the ignition switch is turned to ON and
turned off when the switch is turned back to
LOCK.
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk all the way towards the
steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
ON.)
The
symbol on the main instrument
panel shows when the high beam is on.
Headlight flasher
To flash your headlights, pull the control
stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
The high beam will remain on until you
release the stalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
73
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
Headlight levelling
A delay function allows the low beam head-
lights and back-up lights to remain on for
about30 secondsafterthedriver’sdoorhas
been closed.
(cars with Bi-Xenon headlights)
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlights are
equipped with an automatic headlight level-
ling system, with self-calibrates each time
the vehicle is started. If a fault arises in the
automatic headlight levelling system, the
headlights will be angled down to avoid daz-
zling drivers in oncoming traffic. Adjust your
speed accordingly as the range of the head-
lights will be reduced. Check fuse 20 in the
engine bay fuse box (see page 203).
To activate this function:
1 After turning off the engine, remove the
remote control.
2 Open the driver’s door.
3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
the steering wheel.
The low beam headlights and reversing
lights will come on and remain on for
30 seconds when the door is closed.
A fault in the system will produce the follow-
ing message on the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID):
Adjusting instrument illumination
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Instrument lighting
Contact Saab dealer.
The brightness of the instrument lighting
can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
- signs on the button above the NIGHT
PANEL button).
Special equipment is required for adjusting
the basic headlight alignment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
Instruments and controls
Rear fog light
To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
foglightbuttonontheinstrumentpanel. The
headlights or front fog lights must be on.
The rear fog light is automatically turned off
when the engine is switched off. When the
car is next started, the rear fog light will have
to be switched back on manually by press-
ing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
light will remain on.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of rear fog
lights.
Rear fog light switch
Front fog light switch
Front fog lights
The front fog lights should be used in poor
visibility.
WARNING
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle
brakes suddenly, you may be unable to
avoid a crash and therefore risk injury to
yourself and others.
Theseareautomaticallyturnedoffwhenthe
engine is switched off. When the car is next
started, the fog lights will have to be
switched back on manually by pressing the
fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
remain on.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of front fog
lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
75
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
breaks.
Hazard warning lights
The button for the hazard warning lights is
located on the climate control panel.
When the button is pressed, all the direction
indicators andthesymbolinthebuttonflash
simultaneously.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
Turn signal & lane change indicators
1 Right
2 Left
Hazard warning light switch
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if,becauseofanaccidentorbreakdown,the
car constitutes a hazard to other road users.
WARNING
Turn signal & lane change indicators
The stalk switch has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
indicating a right or left turn, that are can-
celled automatically when the steering
wheel is centered.
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
they shouldbesetupalongthe sideofthe
road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
behind your vehicle. If the car is not
clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
further back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
Instruments and controls
Back-Up
Wipers and washers
Windshield wipers
Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The back-up lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
In position 2 you can set the delay period for
intermittentwipingusingthethumbwheelon
the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
15 seconds.
Thewipers always return to theirhome posi-
tion when the ignition is turned off.
To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
the windshield, proceed as follows:
Windshield wipers
0 OFF
1 Switch off the engine and remove the
remote control.
2 Activate the wipers within the next
16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
down.
1 Single sweep
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing
When the ignition is next switched on the
wipers will return to their home position.
Washers
Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel.
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If
the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
77
Headlight washers (certain variants
only)
Rain sensor (option)
Theheadlightsarewashedatthesametime
as the windshield if the h eadlights are on.
WARNING
The headlights are washed every fifth time
the windshield washers are used or if two
(2) minutes have elapsed since the wind-
shield was last washed.
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ONtoavoidpersonalinjurywhenclearing
snow and ice from the windshield.
The headlight washers are not activated at
speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).
NOTICE
Turn the rain sensor off before washing
the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
damaging the windshield wipers.
Control for setting wiper delay
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies the frequency of wiping
between single sweeps and continuous
wiping, depending on the amount of pre-
cipitation.
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers are
deactivated. This is in order to prioritize the
windshield. The following message is
displayed on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Instruments and controls
Adjusting sensitivity
Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted under Profiler. If you increase the
sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
for reference.
High
The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
The wipers start when there is only
a small amount of water on
the windshield.
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Rain Sensor using the INFO dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select the sensitivity by turning the dial.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Medium
The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Low
The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wip-
ers operate only with a large amount of
water on the windshield, i.e., down-
pour).
Windshield wipers with rain sensor
0 OFF
Rain Sensor
High
1 Single sweep
2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Washers
Medium
Low
The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
somewhat more sensitive at night. This
adjustment is automatic.
Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
make one sweep for reference to see how
much water is on the windshield. In the
future, the sensor compares the amount of
water on the windshield with this reference
value.
If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
operate at low speed when the stalk switch
is set to the AUTO position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
79
Manual climate-control
system
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inlet grille at the bottom edge of the wind-
shield. It passes through a filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in theparcelshelf. It is thenled
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
To optimize the performance of the A/C sys-
tem, all windows and the sunroof should be
shut.
To reduce potential misting on theinsides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more fre-
quently.
Control panel: manual climate control
1 Temperature
6 Rear window/door mirror heating
7 Hazard warning lights
2 Fan speed
8 Air conditioning (A/C)
3 Air distribution
4 Seat heating, front right seat
5 Recirculation
9 Seat heating, front left seat
Temperature control
Fan
The temperature of the incoming air can
be infinitely varied using the temperature
control.
The output of air is controlled by the fan
speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Recommended settings in severe cold
The air distribution control is used to direct the flow of air to the
defroster, panel and floor vents.
The control also permits settings in between the three main settings
defroster, panel and floor:
On starting with a cold engine, set the fan speed to 2 or 3 and select
maximum heat and defroster to heat the cabin and demist the wind-
shield as quickly as possible.
When the engine is warmer and the temperature gauge starts to
rise, fan setting 4 may be chosen. Once the windshield is clear, the
• defroster and floor
air distribution control should be turned to
.
If the rear seat passengers desire more warmth to the feet, turn the
distribution knob one step clockwise.
How quickly the engine warms up will depend on how the car is
driven. It will take longer for the engine to warm up if the car is driven
in a high gear at low engine speeds, such as in town, than if it is
driven at high engine speeds on a motorway, for example.
• panel and floor
• defroster, panel and floor (11 o’clock position)
To counter cold drafts from the front side windows when the control
has been set to defroster or floor, a small flow of air issues from
the outer vents on the fascia.
As the winter comfort setting, we recommend that the distribution
Do not use fan speed 5. This is primarily intended for rapid cooling
during the summer.
knob be turned to
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
81
Settings
for various
weather
conditions
Winter – defroster
Winter – comfort setting
Summer – overcast
Summer – sunny
Defroster
Panel
Floor
Defroster, panel and floor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Instruments and controls
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
Air conditioning (A/C)
The air conditioning is combined with the
conventional climate control system and
is switched on by pressing the
ton, provided that the fan control is in
position 1-5.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
but-
Recirculation
The air conditioning can be used at outdoor
temperatures down to 32°F (0°C). It is not
necessary to disengage the air conditioning
manually as this is done automatically.
If the engine coolant gets too hot, the A/C
compressor will be turned off and the follow-
ing message will be shown on the Saab
Information Display (SID):
Panel vent
When the
button is pressed, the reg-
ular air intake will be closed. In this mode,
the air inside the cabin is recirculated.
Use recirculation when you wish for rapid
cooling at very high outside temperatures.
Switch the air conditioning (A/C) on first.
If necessary, recirculation can be switched
on manually to avoid unpleasant air from
entering the car.
Only use recirculation for a short period
of time at temperatures lower than 50°F
(+10°C), such as to avoid unpleasant air.
Mist or ice may otherwise form on the
windows.
Air vents
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
A/C off due to high engine
temperature.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
83
Electrically heated rear
window/external mirrors
Electric heating, front
seats (option)
This button is located under the fan speed
control.
Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront
seats are heated.
Always switch off theheatingas soon as the
rear window is free from ice and mist. It will
beturnedoff automaticallyafter 12 minutes.
Refrain from placing sharp objects on the
parcel shelf, to avoid damaging the heating
element.
Seat heating is thermostatically controlled.
It can be switched on when the seat temper-
ature is below 102°F (+39°C) and is
switched off at temperatures above 105°F
(+41°C).
Switch off the seat heating once the seat is
warm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Instruments and controls
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
passes through an effective filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in theparcelshelf. It is thenled
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The Automatic Climate-Control syatem
(ACC) automatically maintains the desired
cabin temperature, regardless of the
weather outside.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way.
Note that heating or cooling is not
speeded up by setting the temperature
higher or lower than the final tempera-
ture you desire.
To optimize the performance of the air con-
ditioning system, all windows and the sun-
roof should be shut. The air vents in the
fascia must be open.
ACC panel
10 Manual increase of fan speed
11 Hazard warning lights
12 Manual decrease of fan speed
13 Seat heating, front left seat
1 Temperature setting: left-hand side
2 Manual setting of air distribution
3 Recirculation
4 AUTO (automatic regulation)
5 A/C
6 Defroster
7 Rear window heating
8 Temperature setting: right-hand side
9 Seat heating, front right seat
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
To reduce potential misting on theinsides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more
frequently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
85
The displayed temperature is not the actual
air temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
made for the airflow, relative humidity, solar
radiation, and so on, currently prevailing
inside the car.
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
1 Driver’s zone.
2 Passenger zone.
The temperature in the rear seat will be a
mixture of the two zones.
If you choose the single zone setting, the
entire cabin is treated as one zone. If you
choose the dual zone setting, settings can
be made separately for the driver’s zone
and passenger zone.
Select between single and dual zone set-
tings under Profiler (see page 93).
The cabin temperature can be set to
between58–82°F(15–27°C).Inaddition,HI
(maximum heating and high fan speed) and
LO (maximum cooling and maximum fan
speed) can be selected. HI and LO can only
be selected for the passenger zone if the
driver has selected the same setting.
• The most usual temperature setting is
between 66–74°F (19–23°C), depending
on personal preference and what clothing
is worn.
• Change the temperature setting in 2°F
(1°C) steps.
• Make sure the air vents are open when
cooling the cabin in warm weather.
Settings when HI is selected:
Panel vent
Air vents
• Maximum heat
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
• Air distribution to windshield and floor
• High fan speed (6 bars on the fan display).
Settings when LO is selected:
• Maximum cooling
• Air distribution to air vents in fascia
• Maximum fan speed (8 bars on the fan
display).
• Recirculation ON (depending on outside
temperature).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Instruments and controls
The system uses four sensors:
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
• Outside air temperature sensor
• Cabin air temperature sensor
• Sun sensor
• Blendedairtemperaturesensors(located
in the heater unit and the outer panel vent
duct).
The sun sensor is located centrally on the
top of the fascia.
Note:
If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
system will not be able to regulate the cabin
climate as intended, especially in strong
sunshine.
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
87
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
Ifamanualfunctionis selected, itwillbelockedinbutotherfunctions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
The A/C compressor must be turned on and off
manually with the AC button.
The compressor can only be turned on or off while
the engine is running.
This function has two modes:
• AC – The system cools and dehumidifies the
incoming air. This symbol is not shown in the
display.
• AC-OFF – The A/C compressor is switched off.
The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified.
See also Profiler on page 93.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir-
culation will be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at approx. 32°F (0 °C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at approx. 40°F (+5 °C).
If, when starting the car, the outside air temperature
is between 32°F and 40°F (0 and +5 °C), the A/C
compressor is switched on.
Pressing AUTO once will cancelall previous manual
air distribution selections.
When the engine is started, the ACC system will be
in AUTO mode, provided that no air distribution set-
tings are programmed under Profiler (see page 93).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Instruments and controls
When the system is switched OFF:
• The fan and A/C compressor are switched off.
• The temperature control is set to 0 % heat.
• The current air distribution setting is retained.
• Recirculation can be selected.
To turn the system OFF, press and hold (or press
repeatedly) the button to reduce the fan speed until
the fan is switched off. Then release the button and
press it once more.
The A/C compressor will now be disengaged. To re-
engage the A/C, press one of the following buttons:
• The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
engaged, and the air distribution
and fan speed will switch to AUTO.
The rear window and door mirror heating can be
controlled manually or automatically (refer to
Profiler).
Switch off the rear window and door mirror heating
as soon as the glass is clear. The heating will be
turned off automatically after 12 minutes.
Refrain from placing sharp objects on the parcel
shelf, to avoid damaging the heating element.
• Higher fan speed
The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
engaged, the air distribution will return to its previ-
ous setting and fan speed will increase.
• Defroster
The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
disengaged, the air distribution will switch to
Defroster and the fan speed will increase (6 bars
on the display out of a maximum of 8).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
89
Air distribution
Recirculation is controlled manually.
Recirculation is not selected when the engine is
started (fresh air mode).
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from entering
the car, recirculation can be activated temporarily
while washing the windshield. The recirculation
symbol will however not light up. This function can
be programmed; contact a Saab dealer.
When defroster is chosen, all the front windows are
demisted:
• High fan speed
• The air is directed to the defroster vents
• Normal temperature control
• Recirculation OFF
• Rear window and door mirror heating ON.
The system will remain in defroster mode until the
or
button is pressed.
The following three buttons for air distribution can be selected indi-
vidually or in combination. Press the button or selection of buttons
to produce the airflow you desire. Pressing the same button twice
will return the system to AUTO. You can also select automatic air
distribution by pressing the AUTO button.
Initial air distribution to take effect on starting the engine can be set
under Profiler (see page 93).
Press
or
to increase or decrease the fan
speed. This sets the fan speed (fan speed shownon
display).
Refer also to Profiler regarding the possibility to
increase/decrease the automatic fan speed.
Airflow to windshield vents.
Airflow to facia air vents.
Airflow to floor vents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Instruments and controls
Shown below are several examples of air distribution.
Panel
Windshield – floor (front and rear)
Floor, front and rear
Panel – floor (front and rear)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
91
Formation of ice and mist in extreme weather conditions
It is only in the most extreme conditions that icing and misting of
window glass are likely to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
severecoldcoupledwithhighrelativehumidity,orwhenpassengers
are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following mea-
sures are recommended if such problems should occur:
1 Select
and set the temperature to 70°F (21°C)
2 Select
. If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
Windshield – panel – floor (front and rear)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Instruments and controls
Calibration
Electric heating, front
seats (option)
Calibration is performed automatically
everyfifthtimethecarisstartedafterhaving
been switched off for more than 2 hours.
Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront
seats are heated.
Heating is thermostatically controlled.
Heating is controlled manually but can also
be automatic. Refer to Profiler on page 93.
Threeheatinglevelsareavailable.Pressing
thebuttononcewillturntheheatingonatfull
power. Press the button again to reduce the
heating.
Programming
A number of functions can be customized
under Profiler (see page 93). Further cus-
tomizations can be made at a Saab dealer.
• One press of the button - the thermostat
cuts out at 107°F (+42°C)
• Twopressesofthebutton-thethermostat
cuts out at 98°F (+37°C)
• Three presses of the button - the thermo-
stat cuts out at 91°F (+33°C)
.
.
.
• Four presses of the button - switches the
seat heating off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
93
Profiler
A/C Mode
Climate System
Rear Defroster
Auto
Some of the functions of the ACC system
can be customized.
Auto
A/C off
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Climate System using the
INFO dial.
Dual/Single Zone
Dual zone
Single zone
Default Settings
Are you sure?
Yes No
Manual
Heated Seats
Auto
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Rear Defroster, Heated Seats,
Fan Settings, Air Distribution, A/C
Mode, Dual/Single Zone or Default
Settings by turning the dial.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Once you have adjusted the ACC system
settings under Profiler, CUSTOMIZE will
appear on the ACC display.
Manual
Fan Settings
High speed
Medium speed
Low speed
Air Distribution
Auto
Manual
Windshield
Panel
Floor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Instruments and controls
Explanation of how the ACC system can be
customized under Profiler.
Heated Seats
Fan Settings
Auto:
High speed:
Rear Defroster
The front seat heating is controlled
This selection give a slightly higher
automatically.
fan speed than Medium speed
though with continued automatic
regulation.
Auto:
Select the level by repeatedly
pressing the appropriate button on
the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
= low. The selected heating setting
is saved when the engine is
switched off. Note: The symbol on
the ACC panel goes out if the heat-
ing is turned off automatically by the
system.
The rear window and door mirror
heating is controlled automatically.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Medium speed:
Normalautomaticfanspeed. This is
one of the Default Settings.
Low speed:
Manual:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is switched on with
the button on ACC panel.
This selection give a slightly lower
fan speed than Medium speed
though with continued automatic
regulation.
Manual:
Air Distribution
See Electric heating, front seats
(option) on page 92.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Auto:
The ACC system adapts air tem-
perature and distribution to the pre-
vailing conditions. This is one of the
Default Settings.
Manual:
Windshield:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to the windshield.
Panel:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to air vents in the fascia.
Floor:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to the floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
95
A/C Mode
Auto:
Automatic engagement and disen-
gagement of the A/C. This is one of
the Default Settings.
A/C off:
A/C compressor OFF (see also
page 87). The A/C compressor can
be activated temporarily by press-
ing the AC or AUTO button while on
the road and if the outside tempera-
ture is above 41°F (+5°C). The A/C
will be off the next time the engine is
started.
Dual/Single Zone
Dual zone:
Individual temperature setting for
each zone (see page 85). The sys-
tem saves the settings when the
engine is switched off. This is one of
the Default Settings.
Single zone:
Common temperature setting when
the engine is started. If the temper-
aturesettingforthepassengerzone
ischanged, thesystemwillswitchto
Dual zone control. Single zone con-
trol will return the next time the
engine is started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Instruments and controls
(This page has been left blank).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment
97
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment _________
Electric windows______
Sunroof _____________
Interior lighting _______
Cup holder___________
Ashtray______________
Storage compartments_
Rearview mirrors______
Trunk _______________
98
99
102
105
107
108
109
110
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment
WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel while the
car is stationary so that you are not
distracted from the traffic.
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be adjusted.
There is a release lever under the steering
column.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment
Horn signal
1 Pull down the lever to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
Activate the horn by pressing one of the
three areas shown above on the steering
wheel pad.
3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
lock the steering wheel in position.
When returning the release lever to its
locked position, you may need to adjust the
position of the steering wheel slightly to
allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-
rectly.
Steering wheel lock, see page 123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment
99
Electric windows
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. Risk of serious or
fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch and open one
of the front doors when you leave the
car to prevent personal injury caused
by the activation of the electric
windows, for example, due to children
playing.
Window switches
Window switch in rear door
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
To open
Press down the front edge of the button one
step.
The window will stop when it is fully open or
when the button is released.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
the way down and release it.
The electric windows are operated by
means of switches in the door armrests.
For theelectricwindowstowork, theremote
control must be in the ON position in the
ignition switch.
Comfort opening (option)
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the sunroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and sun-
roof start to open (approx. 2 s).
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
windows, so long as neither of the front
doors has been opened.
Windows havingtheautomatic closing func-
tion (option) can be operated as long as the
car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Interior equipment
To close
Comfort closing (option)
WARNING
Pinch protection
On certain model variants, the electric win-
dows are equipped with pinch protection.
This is activated if something gets trapped
between the window pane and door frame
when the window is closed. The window will
stop and lower slightly.
WARNING
Take care when closing a window to
ensure that no one gets caught.
Make sure no one is so close to the car
that they can be injured if comfort closing
is activated.
Raise the front edge of the button one step.
The window will stop when it is fully closed
or when the button is released.
Automatic closing (option): Raise the
button all the way and release it. If the
window does not close automatically, refer
to Calibration on page 101.
Comfort closing is the remote closing of
open windows and the sunroof, and the
retracting of electrically retractable door
mirrors.
remote control until the windows are closed
and door mirrors retracted (takes roughly
2 s). The doors must be shut.
Confirmation that closing has finished is
provided by the direction indicators, which
closing was not possible. This may be due
to a door being open or a window requiring
calibration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 101
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in, the
pinch protection can be temporarily disen-
gaged and the window closed.
Calibration
WARNING
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
The pinch protection will not be engaged
after a power break until the electric
windows have been calibrated.
2 Press and hold the
button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the window in question.
The pinch protection will be active the next
time a window is operated.
After a power break, the electric windows
must be calibrated for the pinch protection
to work. Fully open and close the windows
at least twice. You will hear a chime after
successful calibration.
Button for temporary deactivation of rear
door window switches and temporary
override of window pinch protection
Deactivating the rear window
switches
The
inthedriver’sdoor deactivates the
window switches in the rear doors.
Overriding the pinch protection
WARNING
The illuminated switch will change colour
from green to orange (deactivated).
Make sure nothing obstructs the window
when it is closed without pinch protection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Interior equipment
Sunroof
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the electric sunroof. Risk of serious or
fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch and open one
of the front doors when you leave the
car to prevent personal injury caused
by the activation of the electric
sunroof, for example, due to children
playing.
Sunroof control
3 Manually controlled closing
4 Automatic closing
5 Ventilation position
1 Manually controlled opening
2 Automatic opening
• The person operating the electric
sunroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
opening, before closing the sunroof.
To open
Manually controlled opening
Slidethecontrolrearwardtoitsfirstposition.
The sunroof will halt when you release the
control. If you do not release the control, the
sunroof will open to the comfort position. To
openthesunrooffurther, releasethecontrol
and then once again press it rearward.
The sunroof isoperated by the control in the
roof console. For the sunroof to work, the
remote control must be in the ON position in
the ignition switch.
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
sunroof, solongasneither of the frontdoors
has been opened.
If the car is equipped with windows having
the automatic closing function, the sunroof
canbeopenedandclosedsolongasthecar
is unlocked until 20 minutes has passed
since the remote control was removed from
the ignition switch.
Automatic opening
Slide the control rearward to the second
position and release it. The sunroof will
open to the comfort position. To open the
sunroof further, slide the control rearward a
second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 103
Ventilation position (rear edge of
sunroof open)
To close
Comfort closing (option)
• To open – press in the control.
• To close – slide the control forward to the
second position.
WARNING
WARNING
Exercise great care when closing the
sunroof to ensure that nothing gets
trapped.
Make sure no one is so close to the car
that they can be injured if comfort closing
is activated.
It is also possible to select the ventilation
position when the sunroof is open by press-
inginthecontrol. Thesunroofwillthenclose
automatically. Press the control once
more to open the sunroof to its ventilation
position.
If you wish to open the sunroof fully from
the ventilation position, you must first close
it (slide the control forward). You can then
slide the control rearward to open the sun-
roof.
Manually controlled closing
Comfort closing is the remote closing of
open windows and the sunroof, and the
retracting of electrically retractable door
mirrors.
Press and hold the locking button on the
remote control until the windows are closed
and door mirrors retracted (takes roughly
2 s). The doors must be shut.
Slide the control forward to its first position.
The sunroof will halt when you release the
control.
Automatic closing
Slide the control forward to its second posi-
tion and release it. The sunroof will close
fully.
The sunroof pinch protection halts closing
and opens the sunroof slightly if something
obstructs closing.
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind.
Comfort opening (option)
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the sunroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and sun-
roof start to open (approx. 2 s).
If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it
will not open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Interior equipment
Pinch protection
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof
when it is closed without pinch protection.
The sunroof is equipped with pinch protec-
tion. This is activated if something gets
trapped when the sunroof is being closed.
The sunroof will stop and open slightly.
Overriding the pinch protection
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (sun-
roof cannot be closed), the pinch protection
can be temporarily disengaged.
Button for overriding the sunroof pinch
protection
Emergency operation of the sunroof
In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-
trical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with a screwdriver.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
Remove thelens from theroof console. Use
a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
screwdriver.
2 Press and hold the
driver’s door whileoperating the window
in question.
3 Close the sunroof with the button on the
roof console.
The pinch protection will be operative the
next time the sunroof is operated.
button on the
Turn clockwise to close the sunroof.
If the rear edge of the sunroof is open (ven-
tilation position), turn the screwdriver
counter-clockwise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 105
Rear lighting
1 Reading lights
2 Roof light
1 Interior lighting always off
2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
3 Interior lighting on continuously
The glove compartment lighting is switched
on and off automatically when the glove
compartment is opened and closed.
When the switch is in the mid-position(door-
activated), the interior lighting will come on:
Interior lighting
• When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
• When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
When the light switch is in the mid-position,
the lighting is switched off automatically
roughly 20 seconds after the last door is
closed or when the ignition is switched ON.
The lighting dims gradually until off.
Theinteriorlightingconsistsofonefrontand
one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour-
tesy lights in the doors. The light switch for
the interior lighting is located on the roof
console by the rearview mirror.
If a door is left open and the light switch is in
position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the
interior lighting will be switched off automat-
ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting is switched on and off
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Sun visor with vanity mirror
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
the cover is raised.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 107
Cup holder
WARNING
• The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china or glass as
these can cause personal injury in the
event of a crash.
• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
or aluminium cans.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
Cup holder in fascia
Cup holder in center console compart-
ment between front seats
NOTICE
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system when using the cup hold-
ers. Soft drinks in particular can cause
malfunctions.
Cup holder in rear seat cushion
Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
the center console compartment between
the front seats and rear seat cushion. The
cup holder between the seats can be raised
if you wish to use the compartment for
storage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Interior equipment
Ashtray
The car has an ashtray in front of the gear
lever.
Lightly press the front of the ashtray to open
it. Remove the insert by taking hold of the
sides andlifting it straightup. Refit the insert
by sliding it straight in.
You can use the electrical socket in the stor-
age compartment under the armrest
between the front seats to charge a mobile
phone, for example. There is a recess on
each side of the compartment which will
accept a lead so that you can close the lid
without damaging the charger lead.
Front ashtray and cigarette lighter
WARNING
The maximum output of the cigarette
lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
ofthesocketinthecompartmentbetween
the seats is the same. Overloading can
result in melting or even fire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 109
Storage compartments
WARNING
The glove compartment must be closed
while travelling. An open glove compart-
ment door could cause personal injury in
the event of a crash.
There are additional storage compartments
in the rear seat armrest, below the front ash-
tray and in the doors.
Open the glove compartment with
the button on the left of the moulding
Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air (cars with ACC only).
This allows the storage of chocolate and
chilled drinks, for example.
Storage pocket on back of seats
Storage pocket on front edge of seats
Storage compartment between front seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
Interior equipment
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
To adjust
The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
and heated. The controls for adjusting the
mirrors are on the driver’s door:
1 Select a door mirror with the upper
button.
2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
Themirrorheatingisturnedontogetherwith
the rear window heating.
Retracting a door mirror
1 Selection of mirror
2 Touch pad for adjustment
3 Reversing position (electric)
If the car has an electrically adjustable
driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
settings are stored in the memory (see
page 18).
Manual retraction
Reversing position
On certain model variants, the passenger-
side mirror glass can be angled down to
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. The mirrors can also be
retractedmanually.Thiscanbeusefulwhen
parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
deckofaferry.Remembertoreturnthedoor
mirrors to their normal positions before
driving off.
facilitate reversing. Press the
button
shown in the illustration. This is located
under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
normal position by pressing the button
again. The mirror will also return to its
normal position if you drive forward approx-
imately 22 yds. (20 meters).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 111
Interior rearview mirror with
autodimming
The system is activated when the forward-
facing sensor detects that it is dark outside
and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
is then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
The autodimming function can be turned
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe
rear-view mirror.
Mirror position lever
1 Normal position
Mirror with autodimming
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 Autodimming ON/OFF
3 Rear-facing sensor
2 Antidazzle position
NOTE!
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
shaded by the trailer.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is of the antidaz-
zle type and can be deflected with the lever
on its underside. Certain variants have an
autodimming rearview mirror.
The lever should be in the normal position
when you adjust the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
Interior equipment
Preparations for first-time programming
Interior rearview mirror with garage
opener, autodimming function and
compass (certain variants only)
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold buttons 1 and 3 for about
20 seconds until the LED starts to flash.
This deletes the factory codes and initiates
the programming phase.
WARNING
Makesurethat peopleandobjectsareout
of the way of moving door or gate to
prevent potential harm or damage.
Programming the garage opener
Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator.
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
2 Hold your existing garage door opener
1–3 in. (3–7 cm) below the rearview
mirror. Sit where you can see the LED
(4) during programming.
3 Press the button on the remote control
and the desired button on the rear view
mirror at the same time.
4 The LED will now start to flash, slowly at
first and then rapidly. The rapidly flash-
ing LED indicates that programming is
complete and that you can release the
buttons.
The remote control may stop transmitting
during programming. If so, continue to hold
the button on the rearview mirror and
release and press the button on the remote
control every other second, "cycling" until
programming is completed.
Retain your original garage door opener
(transmitter) for future programming proce-
dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed garage opener buttons be
erased for security purposes, see page113.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 113
The LED will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. The rapidly flashing LED indicates
that programming is complete and that you
can release the buttons.
Complete erase
Garage doors with rolling security codes
Completelyerasethememoryofthegarage
opener by pressing and holding buttons
1 and 3 simultaneously for 20 seconds.
Confirmation is provided by the LED flash-
ing rapidly for 10 seconds.
A complete erase deletes the frequencies
from all three buttons. It is not possible to
erase the memory of a single button.
Opening a garage door
Press and hold the appropriate button until
the garage door starts to open.
You can of course still use your original
garage door opener even if you have pro-
grammedthegarageopenerintherearview
mirror.
Garage doors with rolling security codes
manufactured after 1996 can be identified
as follows:
• Read the instruction manual for the
garage door.
• Programming the garage opener in the
rearview mirror seems to be successful
but the garage door does not open.
• Press and hold the programmed button.
The garage door uses a rolling security
code if the LED flashes rapidly and after
2 seconds shines constantly.
If the garage door remote control uses roll-
ing security codes, proceed as follows
having programmed the garage opener:
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while
programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.
Reprogramming a button that has previ-
ously been programmed
1 Press and hold the desired button on the
rearview mirror for the entire program-
ming sequence.
2 The LED will start to flash slowly after
20 seconds.
3 Hold your existing garage door opener
1–3 in. (3–7 cm) from the rearview
mirror and press the button on the
remote control.
4 Reprogramming is complete when the
LED starts to flash rapidly.
1 Localise the button labelled "learn" or
"smart" on the motor unit of the garage
door. The location and color of this
button varies between makes.
2 Press and release the "learn" button on
the motor unit. Step 3 must be
performed within 30 seconds of Step 2.
3 Press the programmed button on the
rearview mirror twice (some garage
doors require the button to be pressed
three times; refer to the door’s instruc-
tion manual).
The previous frequency is now erased and
replaced by the new one. Reprogramming
one button does not affect the other buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Interior equipment
Autodimming
Pressbutton5brieflytoswitchautodimming
onoroff.Whenautodimmingisswitchedon,
a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-
dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
switched off. See page 111 for adescription
of operation.
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 115
Compass
The compass is built into the rearview mir-
ror.Thecompassbearingisdisplayedinthe
top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-
tration on page 114.
Changing zones
Theearth’smagneticfieldvariesdepending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged
to ensure a correct bearing.
Compass zones in USA
Compass zones in Canada
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number is now also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel.
If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
needed perform as follows:
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Interior equipment
Trunk
Folding down the rear seat
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
the wide part can be folded down separately.
Nexttothehingesinthetrunkarehandlesforunlockingtherearseat
backrests.
The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
trunk.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
sure that it locks properly in place and that the seatbelt does not
get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ingmessageisdisplayedontheSID(equivalentmessagedisplayed
for right-hand backrest):
WARNING
• Never driver the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
Rear left seat backrest
unlocked.
Trunk Release Handle, see page 118.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, see page
119.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 117
WARNING
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Neverplaceheavyobjectsontheparcelshelf.Thereisalways
a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash. See also page 162.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-
wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
during heavy breaking or a crash.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
WARNING
Load-through hatch
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle
seatbelt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting
from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 236).
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
Thereisalockontherearsideofthehatch. Usethistolockorunlock
the hatch. The position of the lock is designed to prevent unautho-
rized persons from accessing the trunk from inside the cabin.
To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
hatch is now locked.
To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Interior equipment
• Secure small items if the backrest is
folded down. Small items can also be
thrown around inside the car and
cause personal injury.
• The rear seat must be in the upright
position to protect against load
displacement in the event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the
car, as this will alter its handling char-
acteristics (see page 236).
• Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
Trunk Release Handle
Lashing eyes in the trunk
Trunk Release Handle
Lashing eyes
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
There are four lashing eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
WARNING
NOTICE
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
smaller and lighter bags on top.
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using
the four lashing eyes provided in the
trunk. This will avert the danger of
luggage flying around if the car should
brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 119
Trunk lighting
On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
that is switched on and off when the trunk is
opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Cover over emergency opening lever, on
parcel shelf
Emergency opening of the narrow
backrest
The narrow section of the backrest can be
opened in anemergency if the car is without
electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
and you need to access the trunk for a warn-
ing triangle, for example.
• Removethecoveranddepresstheyellow
lever forward.
Tools and spare wheel, see page
212.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Interior equipment
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 121
Starting and driving
Ignition switch ________
Steering wheel lock____
Starting the engine ____
122
123
123
Economical driving_____ 153
Driving in cold weather__ 155
Driving in hot climates __ 156
Towing a trailer ________ 157
Important considerations
for driving __________
125
128
132
133
134
140
141
Driving with a roof rack
load ________________ 161
Refueling ____________
Engine Break-in Period_
Manual transmission___
Automatic transmission
Cruise control ________
Braking______________
Driving with a load _____ 162
Driving with the trunk lid
open________________ 163
Driving in deep water ___ 163
Driving at night ________ 163
Towing the car_________ 164
Traction Control System
(TCS) ______________
144
Driving with the compact
spare wheel__________ 167
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) ______
146
148
148
Jump starting _________ 168
For long trips__________ 170
Parking brake_________
Parking______________
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Starting and driving
Ignition switch
LOCK position
The position lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting can be
turned on.
The ignition switch is located on the center
console between the front seats. In cars
with automatic transmission, the remote
control can only be removed when the
selector lever is in position P.
Cars with automatic transmission: Move the gear lever to P.
The gear lever is locked in position. This is the only position in which the
remote control can be removed.
Cars with manual transmission: The remote control can be removed
regardless of the position of the gear lever.
NOTICE
OFF position
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
Parts of the electrical system are operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the OFF position with the engine
not running as this could cause the battery to run flat in a matter of
hours.
Cars with automatic transmission: The gear lever is not locked. See
also page 135.
WARNING
ON position
The entire electrical system is operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the ON position when the engine
is not running.
Turn the remote control to the OFF position to disconnect the electrical
system.
WhenyouturntheremotecontroltoON,someindicatorandwarninglights
will come oninthe main instrument panel. These shouldgo out after about
3 seconds.
• Always remove the remote control
before leaving children unattended in
the car.
• Apply the parking brake before remov-
ing the remote control.
• Never remove the remote control
while the car is moving. This will acti-
vatethesteeringwheellock and make
it impossible to steer the car.
ST - starter position
The starter motor operates (automatic transmission: selector lever must
be in P or N) when the remote control is turned to this position. When
released, the remote control will spring back to the ON position.
The carhas anelectronicrestartlock. If theenginefailstostart, the remote
control must first be turned back to a position between OFF and LOCK
before the starter motor can be operated again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 123
If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
lock, the following message will be
displayed on the SID:
Steering wheel lock
Starting the engine
The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
lock engages when the remote control is
removedfromtheignitionandunlockswhen
the remote controlisinserted. A clickcanbe
heard when the steering wheel lock locks
and unlocks.
WARNING
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
Ifthesteeringwheellockmalfunctionswhile
the remote control is in the ignition switch,
this may prevent the removal of the remote
control or prevent the car from being
restarted once the engine has been
switched off.
If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
pressing down the lock buttons on the
doors. Lock the front left door from outside
with the traditional key (see page 40). The
car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
gear lever is not in the neutral position,
the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump
forwards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
down. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
not succeed on first attempt you must
remove the remote control before trying
again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
the remote control into the ignition switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not disen-
gageitwillnotbepossibletoturntheremote
control in the ignition switch.
• Cars with automatic transmission:
selectpositionPtoremovetheignition
key. The key can only be removed in
this gear position.
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
Steering wheel locked.
Pull out key, turn steering
wheel. Try again.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Starting and driving
Do not run the starter motor for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 20–30 seconds
before running the starter again, to give the
battery time to recover.
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Let the
engine idle for at least 10 seconds and then
driveaway aslong astheengine oilwarning
light has gone out to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
Cars with automatic transmission
The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
Starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
before the warning and indicator lights have
gone out.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start theenginetheclutch pedalmust
be fully depressed.
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
Note! Once the engine has started, the
brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
normal.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
touch the accelerator.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 125
2 Stopping the engine
Useful tips on starting the engine
Important
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
follows:
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off - stop the engine
when it is idling.
considerations for
driving
1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
essential that you turn the ignition to
ON before depressing the accelerator).
2 Presstheacceleratortothefloorandrun
the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
will prevent the engine being flooded
(fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
fuel supply).
3 Now start the engine in the normal way
- do not touch the accelerator.
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting
the engine.
3 Regulating the charging pressure
1 Starting and driving
• The system is optimized for AON 90.
One of the advantages of boost pres-
sure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower
than AON 87. Severe engine damage
will occur if gasoline lower than 87
octane is used. However, engine
performance will fall slightly and heavy
loading and laboring should be
avoided. For optimum performance,
use the recommended grade of fuel.
• Do not use full throttle until the engine
is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
repeatedly enters the red zone, the
engine may suddenly lose power, due
to the initiation of a monitoring system
that limits the boost pressure. Contact
a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
• Under certain barometric conditions
(high outside temperature and/or high
altitude) the needle may enter the first
partof theredzonewithout necessarily
indicating that a fault has arisen.
• The maximum boost pressure is regu-
lated according to the tendency of the
engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
is perfectly normal. This can occur
when the engine is running at about
3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
extent of this knocking will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• Aprotectivefunction(interruptionofthe
fuel supply) limits the engine speed.
• Isolated instances of knocking can
occur with low-octane fuel. This
controlled form of knocking, followed
by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
a sign that the control system is work-
ing normally, and is perfectly safe for
the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Starting and driving
Ifthediagnosisfunctiondetectsafaultinthe
engine management system, the light
Important considarations with
catalytic converters
NOTICE
"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
theinstrumentpanelwillcomeon(seepage
55). Have the car checked at a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
The catalytic converter is an emission con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
metal alloy).
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
malfunction. Contact a Saab dealer
immediately.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
Thefollowingmessageis shownontheSID:
Reduced engine power.
Contact Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Limp-home
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that checks a number of
internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
throttle valve, the engine management
system will set the throttle system to the
limp-home mode. This means:
NOTICE
If
"Engine malfunction (CHECK
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
(indicating thatthe engineis misfiringand
the catalytic converter can be damaged),
ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
should go out or start to shine constantly.
If the light continues to flash despite
easing off the accelerator, you may
continue to drive the car but at the mini-
mum throttle permitted by the current traf-
fic situation. Have the car checked as
soon as possible at a Saab dealer.
• idling control will be poor (uneven idling
since regulated by ignition and fuel
supply)
• engine performance will be reduced
• the cruise control will not function
• thecapacityoftheA/Ccompressor willbe
limited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 127
• Have the car serviced regularly in accord-
ance with the service program.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to a Saab dealer.
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could there-
fore start a fire.
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you bump start the car when the engine
isalreadyatnormalworkingtemperature,
the engine must start to run on all cylin-
ders. Abort bump starting if the engine
fails to start immediately.
Failure to strictly follow these instructions
can result in damage to the catalytic con-
verter and associated components, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
• If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
or if the battery is flat), the car can be
bump started (manual transmission only)
or started using jump leads to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
switch off the engine to avoid serious
damage to the catalytic converter.
Engine management system with catalytic
converter
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor
3 Catalytic converter
NOTICE
Ifthecarrunsoutofgas,airmaybedrawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
Contact a Saab dealer for advice.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
the engine compartment and under the
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
effect that would obtain at the corre-
sponding road speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Starting and driving
Refueling
NOTICE
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.
WARNING
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
• never smoke while refueling
• never use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
• gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline
Filler cap removed for refueling
• 2.0t engine 175 hp – AON 90.
• 2.0 Turbo engine 210 hp - AON 93.
• donotuseamobilephoneatthesame
time as refueling
Sometimes, gasoline can contain a number
of additives containing oxygen. The most
common of these are alcohol or some type
of ether. The maximum oxygen level is
restricted by national regulations.
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is
used, the maximum levels approved by
Saab are: 5 % by volume of methanol; or
10 % by volume of ethanol. The most
common type of ether used is MTBE
(methyl tertiary butyl ether), of which fuel
may contain a maximum of 15 % by volume.
Only use fuel from a well-known oil com-
pany.
All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on
gasoline with an octane rating between
AON 87–93.
The engine management system monitors
the combustion and automatically adapts to
the fuel used.
Always use the correct grade of fuel:
unleaded AON 87–93.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 129
Filler cap
The filler cap has a bayonet fitting. Turn the
cap approximately 1/4 of a turn until you
hear one click.
NOTICE
• Fill to maximum filling capacity.
If the fuel filler cap is not on correctly, the fol-
lowing message is displayed on the SID:
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
Tighten fuel filler cap.
Manually opening the fuel filler door, see
page 52.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank full.
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
Filler cap
Refueling
Refer to page 155 for information regarding
gasoline anti-freeze.
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-
hand rear fender.
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while filling is in progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops.
NOTICE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
needed when the temperature rises.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Starting and driving
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-
tors which can cause poor driveability, use
only quality gasolines that contain deter-
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in
their composition and quality, you should
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-
riencing driveability and/or hard starting
problems shortly after refueling your car. In
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended
withgasoline.Thesetypesofgasolinesmay
befound inallpartsoftheUnitedStatesand
Canada, but particularly in geographic
areas and cities that have high carbon
monoxide levels. Saab approves the use of
such "reformulated" gasolines in its prod-
ucts, which help in reducing pollution from
all motor vehicles, provided that the follow-
ing blending percentages are met by such
fuels:
Other, less common, fuel additives used by
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable,
provided that the resultant gasoline is not
more than 2.7 % oxygen by weight. In many
cases, youmaynotbeabletodeterminethe
exact type or percentage by volume of fuel
additive in the gasoline you purchase for
your car.
SomeCanadianandU.S. gasolinescontain
an octane enhancing additive called meth-
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission
control system performance may deterio-
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
However, these blended gasolines are reg-
ulated and should never exceed these rec-
ommended blend percentages and service
station operators should know if their gaso-
lines contain detergents and oxygenates,
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to
noticeaproblemwiththewayyourcarstarts
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try
a different brand of gasoline.
Recommended fuel:
For optimum performance we recommend
90 AON for 175 hp engines and 93 AON for
210 hp engines.
Octane rating is determined according to
the formula:
MON + RON
2
where MON is the Motor Octane Number,
and RON is the Research Octane Number.
The average of these two values is the
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears
on the pump at a retail gas station. This
value is sometimes referred to as the "Anti-
Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average Octane
Number" (AON).
• Up to 10 % ethanol by volume, with corro-
sion inhibitors.
• Up to 15 % MTBE by volume (methyl
tertiary butyl ether).
Up to 5 % methanol by volume, with an
equal amount of a suitable co-solvent and
added corrosion inhibitors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 131
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87
octane or higher. Use of gasoline with an
octane rating lower than 87 can result in
severeenginedamage. Damagecausedby
incorrect fuel being used is not covered
under the terms of the New Car Warranty
and will be the responsibility of the owner. It
is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which were developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Asso-
ciation (AAMA) and endorsed by the Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Associa-
tion for better vehicle performance and
engine protection. Gasolines meeting the
AAMAspecificationcouldprovideimproved
driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasolines.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Higher concentrations of methanol than
listed above, or the use of methanol-
blended gasoline without suitable co-
solvents and corrosion inhibitors, can
damageyourcar’sfuelsystem, leadingto
the need for repairs which are not
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores
fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
covered by Saab’s product warranty.
, thus indicating a fault that must be
checked by your Saab dealer, see page
55.
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
In Canada, look for the
"Auto Makers’ Choice" label on
the fuel pump.
Avoid driving with the fuel low level indi-
cator illuminated. The symbol illuminates
whenlessthanapproximately2.5 gallons
(10 litres) of fuel remains in the tank.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If
the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s
bad enough, it can damage your engine. If
you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you
hear alittlepingingnoisewhen you’re accel-
erating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane
fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, con-
stant knock that means you have a problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Starting and driving
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (indicated on the
underhood emission control label), it is
designed to operate on fuels that meet Cal-
ifornia specifications. If such fuels are not
available in states adopting California emis-
sions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal spec-
ifications, but emission control system per-
formance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See "Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)" on page 55. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause
of failure. In the event it is determined that
the causeofthecondition isthetypeof fuels
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT);ask
your service station operator whether or not
the fuel contains MMT. Saab does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If
fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug
life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance may be
affected. The Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE) light on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized Saab dealer for service.
Engine Break-in Period
Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
surfaces.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 133
Manual transmission
Clutch interlock
To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
depressed.
When changing gear, fully depress the
clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
isinadvisabletodrivewithyourhandresting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
There are two manual gearbox versions:
a 5-speed gearbox and a 6-speed gearbox.
Reverse gear on the 6-speed gearbox is to
the left of 1st gear. Raise the ring under the
gear knob to engage reverse.
Gear positions, 5-speed
Gear positions, 6-speed
Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.
It is not necessary or recommended to
follow the shift-up recommendations in all
driving conditions, for example, when driv-
ing in heavy urban traffic or steep downhill
grades.
However, shiftingwiththelightshouldresult
in improved fuel economy. Therefore, for
reduced fuel consumption and better
energy conservation, you should make a
habit of shifting before or when the shift-up
light comes on.
Shift up indicator
(U.S. models only)
NOTICE
When reverse gear is to be engaged,
the car must be at a standstill with
the accelerator fully released.
Cars equipped with a manual transmission
have a "Shift-up" light on the instrument
panel. The light begins to work after the
vehicle is warmed up and provides you with
a good indication when to shift to a higher
gear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Starting and driving
Automatic transmission
WARNING
• Depressthebrakepedalwhenshifting
the selector lever from P or N.
Indication of gear position on main
instrument panel
• The car must be at a standstill before
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in the P or N position.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be idling when you move the selector lever
from one position to another. If not, the
transmission could be damaged.
Selector lever
1 Position for manual gear selection
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
The remote control can only be removed
when the selector lever is in the P position.
NOTICE
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
After selecting a drive position, pause
brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
The automatic transmission has an elec-
tronic control module. The control module
receives information including accelerator
position and road speed. Using this and
other information, it controls the hydraulic
pressure of the transmission to ensure that
gear changing is as smooth as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 135
Adaptive gear change patterns
Thermal transmission protection
The adaptive gear change pattern function
adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv-
ing conditions. The transmission control
module senses the engine load, vehicle
speed and temperature of the transmission.
A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sarygearchangesandundesiredincreases
in transmission temperature.
Certain variants use a special change pat-
ternforthefirstfew minutesafteracoldstart
so that the catalytic converter reaches its
working temperature more quickly.
The transmission has built-in protection
against overheating. This protection is pro-
vided by the controlmodule, whichchanges
gear change patterns.
1 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 257°F (125°C), the gear
change pattern is changed.
2 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 275°F (135°C), the gear
change pattern is again changed.
3 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 302°F (150°C), engine
torque will be limited to 147 ft.lbs.
(200 Nm).
Selector lever detent
Park Brake Shift Lock
Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-
tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
must be pressed in at the same time as the
brake pedal is held depressed.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed in before the lever can be
moved between certain positions.
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock, see page 137.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Starting and driving
Lock-up
Driving in hilly country with a heavy
load
Descending hills
The transmission’s torque converter has a
lock-up function. This can lock the torque
converter in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, thus
reducing the engine speed and fuel con-
sumption.
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down to 4th gear. If youdesire more
powerful engine braking, manually select a
lower gear (see page 139).
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive with the selector lever in the D posi-
tion. The adaptivegear change patterns are
then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
a down change is made to optimize acceler-
ation, e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed,
unless you ease off the accelerator before
reaching this. Kick-down works in manual
mode in 4th and 5th gears if the engine
speed is lower than 2,000 rpm.
WARNING
Remembertousethebrakingeffectofthe
engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you
are descending long or steep hills to
spare the brakes.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Towing
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,
see page 164.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 137
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
Limp-home
If the transmission malfunctions, the control
module will activate limp-home mode. In
this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are avail-
able. Select 2nd gear when driving at low
speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds. 2nd
gear must be selected manually. Select 5th
gear manually or move the selector lever
to D (see page 139).
NOTICE
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector lever out of
the park position, even if the ignition is
ON. If for some reason the selector lever
has to be moved out of the park position
(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
described below.
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Contact Saab dealer.
1 Apply the parking brake.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
compartment ahead of the selector
lever.
3 Under the floor of the storage compart-
ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
hold the plastic lever while moving the
selector lever from P to N.
4 Remove the tool.
5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately, otherwise it
should remain on.
Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
Contact a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Starting and driving
Selector lever positions
P
N
You must press the brake pedal to move
the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
Inneutral,thetransmissionisdisengagedfromthe
engine. The engine can be started but make sure
the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
movement.
The selector lever is locked and the transmission
is mechanically blocked.
The engine can be started.
To move the selector lever out of the P position,
depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
(catch) on the selector lever.
Only select the park position (P) when the car is
stationary.
To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
theengine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
position (D).
R
D
Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
stationary. The detent release button must be
pressed before the selector lever can be moved
to R.
Thedriveposition(D) isthenormaloneforforward
driving. The transmission shifts automatically
between all gears from 1st to 5th, the timing of
which depends on factors such as the current
accelerator position and the speed of the car.
Pause for a moment before applying the acce-
lerator, to allow the gears to engage.
Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
touching the accelerator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 139
Sentronic, manual gear selection
Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
(to the left position D) to select gear manually.
Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
the letter M after each gear change.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enableyou toremainina low gear foran extended
period of time.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to pull
off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
Steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection (Vector models)
When descending steep hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-
erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
Vector models also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-
ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
position.
Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
gear by pressing the left-hand button.
Kick-down only operates for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).
When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
enough to avoid overrevving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Starting and driving
To set the desired speed
Cruise control
(Cruise control system)
1 Slide the switch to ON.
2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
SET/– when the car has reached the
desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
h)).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system in
wetor icy conditions, indense trafficoron
winding roads.
To increase the preset speed
You can increase the speed in any of
the following ways:
• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 mph) (when cruise
control already engaged).
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/+positionuntil
the desired speed is reached (when
cruise control already engaged).
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion), the brakes must be applied once
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
Cruise control switches
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
The system has the following functions:
Tap brakes lightly before
using cruise control.
1 ON: engaged
2 OFF: disengaged
3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
the set speed
4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
the set speed
5 RESUME:re-engagesthesystematthe
set speed
The CRUISE indicator light in the main
instrument panel comes onwhentheswitch
is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
while the cruise control is ON, the system
will be ON the next time the engine is
started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 141
To reduce the preset speed
You can reduce speed in any of the follow-
ing ways:
To re-engage the system
Braking
Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will
return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
It is good practice to try your brakes period-
ically while driving. This is particularly
important when driving in heavy rain, on
roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly now and again. This
should also be done after the car has been
washed, and in extremely damp weather.
• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/–positionuntil
the desired speed is reached.
To disengage the system
The system will be disengaged:
• As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed (cars with manual transmis-
sion).
• When the switch is slid to To disengage
the system temporarily.
• When the switch is slid to OFF.
• When the TCS/ESP system is operative.
Temporary increase in speed
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
such as when negotiating long descents
with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-
dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
braking effect of the engine. If the car has
automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
gear.
Youcanhelptoprolongthelifeofthebrakes
by thinking ahead and braking harder over
short periods, rather than braking more
moderately over long stretches.
Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
transmission),toexceedthesetspeedsuch
as for overtaking. When you release the
accelerator, the car will return to the set
speed.
• When position N is selected (cars with
automatic transmission).
To disengage the system
temporarily
Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
only as far as to disengage the cruise con-
trol. Allow the switch to spring back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Starting and driving
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-
butes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s speed or load.
The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
which will switch on the ABS warning light
if a fault is detected in the system (see
page 54).
ABS brakes
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin
heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon
the road, in snow, on a wet road
surface or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, thebrakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
WARNING
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• Tostop asquickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,
press the brake pedal down hard
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
The following message will appear on the
SID (and corresponding symbol on main
instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
neously, and steer the car to safety.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand
dry.
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-
lates the brake pressureto each wheel. The
pressure is automatically reduced just
before the wheel locks up and then
increases again to the point at which the
wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-
sors send information to the brake system’s
electronic control module for every 4 or so
inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
information is processed continuously to
ensure that the adjustment of the brake
pressure will be as exact as possible.
Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
second.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
• Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 143
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-
ing control is retained.
WhentheABSsystemoperatesyouwillfeel
the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-
essary steer to safety.
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
The above is critical.
Braking with ABS brakes.
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the brake pedal. This means that
the driver can brake gently to test the condi-
tion of the road and adapt their driving
accordingly.
Indication that the system is operating:
pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise
It is well worth practising the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Starting and driving
If the two front wheels are rotating at the
same speed but are turning faster than the
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
reduced to eliminate the difference.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
TCS OFF
lights up under the speedometer if:
Traction Control
System (TCS)
Anti-spin system
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• there is a fault in the ABS system
The advantages of the TCS become most
apparent when the cohesion between the
front wheels and the road surface is so low
that one or both of the wheels would lose
their grip were the car not equipped with the
TCS, e.g.:
• the system has been switched off
manually.
WARNING
When driving normally, the TCS system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The TCS must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different
surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
the TCS functions like an electronic differ-
ential lock, making sure that both wheels
rotate at the same speed.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery surface, in which case
the system eliminates wheelspin. The
system also functions when the car is
reversing.
How the system works
The Traction Control System (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS uses information from the ABS
wheelsensorsto detectwhenthefront (driv-
ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
wheels.Itthenmonitorswhetheronedriving
wheel is rotating faster than the other. If so,
the faster wheel is retarded until both
• When cornering, if the inside front wheel
rotates faster than the other wheels.
wheels are rotating at the same speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 145
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
Youcanswitchthesystemoff manuallywith
the TCS button, whereupon the
light
under the speedometer will come on. The
TCS cannot be switched off if the car is trav-
elling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
be switched off automatically.
Thefollowingmessageis shownontheSID:
TCS button
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
TCS indicator
WhentheremotecontrolisturnedtotheON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
operative.
The
light under the speedometer
comes on whenthe TCS is operative, that is
when one of the wheels has lost its grip.
The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
thatthelimitforgriphasbeenexceededand
that the driver must exercise greater care.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Starting and driving
How the ESP system works
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
Anti-skid system
TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure
wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
steering wheel position and braking pres-
sure. The values provided by these sensors
are used to calculate the actual direction of
the car, the intentions of the driver and
whether the ESP should be engaged.
If this direction does not agree with that
intended by the driver, calculated from the
steering wheel position, the ESP is
engaged.
WARNING
When driving normally, the ESP system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The ESP must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads
must be adopted.
The ESP improves the driver’s chances
of retaining control over the car in critical
situations.
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
safety system that helps the driver to stabi-
lize the car in unusual circumstances that
can otherwise be difficult to handle.
Illustration of how the system applies the
brakes on one or several wheels to avoid
a skid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 147
If a fault is detected in the system, the
following message will be displayed on
the SID:
ESP indicator light
The
light under the speedometer
comesonfor ashortperiodoftimewhenthe
ESP system is operative.
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the ESP is
operative.
Turning ESP system off
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP button, whereupon the
light
NOTICE
under the speedometer will come on. The
car must be travelling slower than 35 mph
(60 km/h). The TCS is also disengaged.
ESP button
Changes to the chassis, such as a
change of wheels, shock absorbers or
springs, could affect the function of the
ESP system.
TheESP is alwaysengaged during braking,
even if it has been switched off manually
with the ESP button.
ESP OFF
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changing any chassis components.
lights up under the speedometer if:
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• the system has been switched off
manually
• when the remote control is turned to the
ON position, the lamp is lit for about
4 seconds while the system performs
self-diagnosis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Starting and driving
Parking brake
Parking
WARNING
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car. If the car is to be
left parked for a long time, refer to
page 150.
• Never leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the remote control.
• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
• Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
• Do not park on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot andcouldstart
a fire.
Correct hold
• Grasp the parking brake lever in such
awaythatnofingersgettrappedwhen
you release the parking brake.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
pulls off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
• Apply the parking brake.
The parking brake lever is situated between
the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
• Shift into Reverse (automatic trans-
mission: select P), remove the remote
control and lock the car.
Release park brake.
the
indicator light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, press the pawl button on the under-
side of the lever and lower the lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 149
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone,
computer or similar object visible in
the car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-
ous parking space.
1 Downhill with curb .
Turn the wheels toward
thecurbandedgethecar
forwards until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
2 Uphill with curb. Turn
3 Uphill or downhill with-
out curb. Turn the wheel
towards the edge of the
road so that the car,
should it move, will not
roll towards the middle of
the road.
• Thieves strike whenever and wher-
ever they are given the opportunity.
thewheelsawayfromthe
curb and edge the car
backward until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Starting and driving
• Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
ventilated building. Leave the parking
brake OFF!
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. three tofour months, the following
steps are recommended:
If necessary, use wheel chocks.
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the storage
period, remove the battery and store it in
a frost-free place.
• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
stands, increase the tire pressure to
43 psi (3 bar).
• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
and lubricate them with glycerol
(glycerine).
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
the road and applying the brakes a few
times.
Leave all the door windows open a crack
and cover the car with a non-plastic
tarpaulin–notonemadeofplasticwhichwill
not breath.
• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
forming in it.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 151
Saab Parking
Assistance
Saab Parking Assistance
(option)
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• The parking aid system can facilitate
parking and reversing.
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
• Bear in mind that small objects, such
as a child lying on the ground, and
narrow objects cannot always be
detected by the system.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects, such as a post, since the surface
area presented to the car is too small.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. When the
sensors detect an object within the moni-
tored area, pulses of sound (- - - - -) will be
heard. The frequency of these pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.
Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in the
rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
(1.8 meters) behind the car.
If the car is heavily laden, the system may
falsely indicate that there is an object within
the detection range. This is since the sen-
sors are angled towards the ground when
the car is tail-heavy.
When the distance to the object is less
than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
be heard.
When an object is approximately 3 ft.
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly (frequency
increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Starting and driving
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-
nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
the system is automatically deactivated.
Error messages
If the system malfunctions, the following
message will appear on the SID:
The system can be switched off using
Profiler.
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Park Assistance using the
INFO dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select SPA on or SPA off.
Parking assistance
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
If the system is subject to interference, the
following message will be shown on the
SID:
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
NOTICE
Parking assistance sensor
interference.
Park Assistance
SPA on
The sensors must be kept clean to func-
tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
their sensitivity.
SPA off
If this message appears, clean the sensors.
The sensors are located in the black trim on
the rear bumper
Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
Explanation of SPA on and SPA off.
SPA on
You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
Parking Assistance as follows:
Saab Parking Assistance is activated
automatically when reverse is
engaged. The system warns of objects
behind the car.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
connected to the trailer contact, the
system will be deactivated automati-
cally. You can also deactivate the sys-
temtemporarilywiththe CLEAR button
if reverse has been engaged and the
system is active.
• Engage reverse and press the CLEAR
button on the SID control panel.
The system will be reactivated the next time
you engage reverse.
SPA off
Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 153
How to read the diagram:
Economical driving
Factors affecting fuel consumption
The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
affected by driving conditions, climate, road
conditions, speed, driving technique, and
so on.
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
100 km), the actual fuel consumption
3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
– 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
It is clear from the diagram that both dis-
tance driven and outside temperature have
a significant impact on fuel consumption,
after a cold start.
If the car is normally driven on short jour-
neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
and from work, the average consumption
will be 60–80% above the normal level.
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher during the break-in period (the
first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).
Weather conditions
Summer temperatures give better fuel
economy than winter ones. The difference
can be as much as about 10%. Consump-
tion increases in cold weather because the
engine takes longer to reach its normal
operating temperature. The transmission
and wheel bearings also take longer to
warm up. Even distance affects consump-
tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
do not give the engine enough time to
reach its optimum temperature. Wind con-
ditions also have a marked effect on fuel
consumption.
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
Driving techniques
• To obtain the best running economy, with
regard to fuel consumption and general
wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
frequent braking and much changing
down all give higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a caravan all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not warm up the engine while the car
is stationary.
If idling, the engine will take much longer
to reach its optimum temperature, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Starting and driving
engine wear is at its greatest during this
period. Drive off as soon as possible after
starting the engine and avoid high engine
speeds.
• Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
possible. Match your driving to the
prevailing traffic conditions.
• Check the fuel consumption regularly.
Increased fuel consumption can indicate
that something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked at a Saab dealer.
Practicalroadtestshavedemonstratedthat
substantial savings in fuel consumption can
be made if the above advice is followed.
Engine block heater (standard
equipment in Canada, accessory in
U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
Thewarmeritisoutside,theshorterthetime
the engine heater needs to be connected.
Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
fuel consumption than driving in a high
gear because of the higher engine speed
for any given road speed. Always shift up
as soon as traffic conditions allow and
drive in the highest gear as much as
possible.
• Check the tire pressure once a month.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
to be slightly high than too low. Under-
pressure increases fuel consumption.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
Road conditions
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
this in the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 155
• Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
several times before the onset of winter.
This will prevent condensation water in
the fuel tank from freezing and causing
interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-
hood of condensation is lowest when the
fuel tank is full.
If the car is parked outside and the
temperature is below zero, carburettor
spirit is of little use as it cannot remove
water that has already frozen. Park the
car in a warm place so that any ice that
may have built up melts, then add carbu-
rettor spirit when refueling.
Condensation is caused by temperature
fluctuations, either in the outside temper-
ature alone or when the car is alternately
parked outdoors and in a garage.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, althoughthis has been achievedat
theexpenseofsomewhatreducedgripon
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
Winter tires, particularly studded tires,
generally make driving safer on snow and
ice.
Driving in cold weather
In cold weather, special attention should be
paid to the following:
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries. Ifwintertiresarefitted, thesame
type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
Saabdealer willbepleasedtoadviseyouon
the best tires for your car.
Remember that tires age: it may therefore
be necessary to change winter tires before
they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad-
ually lose their friction properties with age.
If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
has a manual transmission, the best
response is to freewheel, which means
declutching so that the wheels neither drive
nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
desired direction.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
off the accelerator slightly and steer cau-
tiously in the desired direction.
• Before driving off, make sure that the
wiper blades have not frozen to the wind-
shield.
• Remove any snow from the heating
system air intakes between the hood and
the windshield.
• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-
denum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires are
in good condition.
• For how to check the level of antifreeze in
the engine coolant, see page 179.
If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
same direction as the movement of the rear
of the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Starting and driving
2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
normal temperature is shown (about in
themiddle of the scale) beforeswitching
off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
topped up, carefully unscrew the
expansion tank cap.
Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
antifreezeand50 %cleanwater. Usean
antifreeze approved by Saab.
Driving with tire chains
Driving in hot climates
Snowchainsmustonlybefittedtothewheel
and tire dimensions that Saab recommends
in "Technical data" on page 235.
Contact a Saab dealer regarding approved
tire chains.
Always check the coolant level before start-
ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the
coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
mark on the expansion tank (boundary
betweentheupperandlowersectionsofthe
tank).
At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
WARNING
• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone, the following message
will be shown on the SID:
WARNING
• Tire chains can reduce directional
stability.
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap
Hot engine.
Make a safe stop.
Run engine on idle.
• Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
wheels.
completely when the engine is hot.
1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
engine. Do not remove the cap on the
cooling system expansion tank, even if
the tank is empty. The engine tempera-
tureshoulddecrease. Ifthetemperature
continues to rise with the engine idling,
the engine must be switched off.
• The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapour can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before removing
it.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not foul the
wheel arch liner at full lock.
3 Have the car’s cooling system checked
at a Saab dealer.
• Refer to the "Technical data" section
on page 235, for information on wheel
and tire dimensions approved for the
fitting of tire chains.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 157
Trailer hitch attachment
Towing a trailer
NOTICE
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
with trailer brakes.
An electrical socket is provided for connect-
ingthetrailer electrics. This islocated under
the floor trim by the left-hand tail light.
TheSaabgenuineelectricalsocketenables
thebatteryinthetrailerontowtobecharged
during while driving. Also, if the car has
SPA, this is deactivated automatically if a
trailer is hitched up and correctly connected
to the Saab genuine trailer socket.
• Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch,
since other models can damage the
car’s bodywork and electrical system.
WARNING
• Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
steeper than 15 %. The load on the
drive (front) wheels will be so low that
the wheels can start to spin and
prevent further progress.
• ConsultaSaabdealerforguidanceon
how to connect a trailer hitch.
• Exercise carewhen drivingonuneven
roads or against the curb if the car is
heavilyladen. Thisparticularlyapplies
to cars with 18" wheels.
• In addition, the car’s parking brake
may not always be sufficient to hold
the car and trailer securely, as the
wheels may start to slide.
Saab recommendations:
• Always apply the trailer’s parking
brake when unhitching it. There is
otherwise a risk of personal injury or
damage to the bumper should the
trailer start to roll.
• Use a genuine Saab towbar that is
designed and tested for your Saab.
• Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
which towbar is designed for your car.
• When you hitch up the trailer be sure
to attach its safety chains to the holes
by the hitch attachment.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
requirements regarding speed limits for
towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
braking requirements, and also any spe-
cial driving licence provisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Starting and driving
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorder as the
temperature of the transmission increases:
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).
• Gear change pattern is altered
• A/C compressor is switched off
• Max. engine torque is reduced
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
6-8
3330 (1500) unlimited
3080 (1400) max. 15
2645 (1200) max. 15
2200 (1000) max. 15
Gearbox too hot.
9-11
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
12-14
max. 15
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
When continuing your journey, manually
select a low gear in which the engine speed
is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
(see page 139).
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
6-8
2200 (1000) unlimited
1760 (800) max. 15
1100 (500) max. 15
880 (400) max. 15
9-11
12-14
max. 15
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 159
Recommendations for cars with
manual transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-
ment panel.
When the needle is just outside the red
zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
off and, on certain engine variants, the max-
imum engine torque will be limited.
When continuing your journey, select a low
gear in which the engine speed is about
3,500 rpm until the incline eases.
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards two-wheel trailer, concentrate the
load over the wheels and keep it as low as
possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the load
on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be included in the
total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
may have to be reduced by the correspond-
ing amount.
Distribution of load in trailer
WARNING
a Light
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
b Moderate
c Heavy
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Starting and driving
Checks before driving
Driving considerations
Make sure that the car and trailer are in
good working order. This is essential since
towing a trailer increases the strain on the
car.
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking performance reduced. The
trailer’s braking system and suspension
also have a considerable effect on these
characteristics. See also "Driving with a
load" on page 162.
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and trailer.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
Drive carefully:
• descending hills
• on uneven roads
• over railway crossings
• when meeting large vehicles
Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select
gear M1 when ascending or descending
steep hills.
• Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and trailer is properly secured and
adjusted.
• Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
properlyconnectedandisnotsolongthat
it drags along the ground. Also, make
sure the cable is not too short and risks
breaking when turning a corner.
Reversing
• Check all bulbs.
Get someone to help you keep an eye out
behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
always provide sufficient rearward vision
when reversing.
• Check the car and trailer brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the cara-
van or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
is raised and locked.
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and trailer are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 161
Driving with a roof rack
load
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Adjust your speed to the prevailing
conditions.
• Duetohigheraerodynamicsdrag, fuel
economymaysufferwhendrivingwith
a roof rack.
Mounting holes for roof carrier
5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
mounted.
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
must be included in the car’s maximum per-
missible payload and axle load.
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for your car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
securely.
1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
car.
2 Insertascrewwithwasherintoeachroof
carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
3 The roof carriers are marked front and
back.
4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
the roof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Starting and driving
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Note: Remember to adjust the tire pres-
sures if you change the load in the car sig-
nificantly or intend to drive at substantially
lower or higher speeds than normal.
Tires
Driving with a load
Thehandlingcharacteristicsareaffectedby
how the car is loaded.
WARNING
• Placetheheaviestload asfar forwardand
as low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the lashing eyes (see
page 118).
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load of the
roof box, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
• Do not exceed the car’s permissible
gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
page 236).
• Roof loads can negatively affect telecom-
munication.
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
• punctures
• separation of the tire and tread
• damage to the sidewalls
• damage to the rims on poor roads
• poor handling characteristics
• premature tire wear
Automatic tire pressure monitoring, see
page 207.
• increased fuel consumption.
Note: Low tire pressure also causes prema-
ture tire wear and increased fuel consump-
tion.
Tire pressure should match the current load
and speed of the car (see page 245).
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases approximately
4 psi/27 kPaasthe tiresbecome warm(e.g.
during highway driving). When the temper-
ature of the tires changes by 50°F (10°C),
the tire pressure will change 2 psi/13 kPa.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 163
Drivingwiththetrunklid Driving in deep water
open
Driving at night
Bear in mind the following points, especially
when driving at night:
NOTICE
Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or fully
• Nighttime driving requires your full
concentration
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• The number of drivers under the influence
of drugsis likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
open, since exhaust fumes can be drawn
Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
into the cabin.
than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
than at idling speed. Water can otherwise
close all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)
besuckedintotheengine. Theenginewill
and set the cabin fan to its highest speed
be damaged if water enters the intake
setting.
system.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
• Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
• Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
dawn.
• Check the headlight levelling setting (see
page 73).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Starting and driving
Front towing eye
WARNING
Towing the car
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye is
screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
thread!
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• The towing eye is only designed for
towing the car on roads. It must not
be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
for example.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should snap. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
Front towing eye fitted.
The towing eye has a left-hand thread!
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car when it is on tow.
• Never drive with the towing eye fitted
to the front bumper. Return it to its
designated storage space.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be recovered.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON
position if the car is moved with the
engine not running.
The front towing eye is stowed by the spare
wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper
is a cover concealing the attachment point
(tapped hole) for the towing eye.
• The steering wheel lock disengages
when the remote control is inserted
into the ignition switch, if the battery
has sufficient charge.
1 Press the knob on the upper section of
this cover to open it.
2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing
eye has a left-hand thread!
3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to
tighten it properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 165
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
being jerked violently.
Cars with automatic transmission:
NOTICE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
Rear towing eye
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
must not be towed at speeds exceeding
30 mph (50 km/h) nor for adistance of more
than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
transported over a longer distance, a tow
truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
The engine cannot be started by towing or
pushing the car. In an emergency, the
engine can be started as described under
"Jump starting" on page 168.
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanent towing eye at the
rear under the bumper.
If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
be used instead of the towing eye.
Towing the car
NOTICE
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
parking lights.
Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
hazard warning lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles on tow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Starting and driving
Transporting the car
NOTICE
Vehicle recovery
If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
truck, or similar, it must be securely
strapped down. There are attachment
points for this purpose on the underside of
the car. The attachment points are oblong
hole that have been reinforced to cope with
the stresses that arise during this type of
transport.
If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
Attachment points for anchorage straps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 167
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare wheel:
Driving with the
compact spare wheel
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan
one compact spare wheel at a time.
• Avoid driving against the curb.
• Do not use snow chains.
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
conceal the warning text.
WARNING
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
tire can overheat affecting the car’s
roadholding.
• Tire pressure: refer to page 243.
• The spare wheel or punctured wheel
must be stowed under the trunk floor,
andsecuredinplacewiththeretaining
nut.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel, this can be temporarily placed
outside up in the spare wheel well but
only while driving to the closest work-
shop.
Observe the following when the compact
spare wheel is fitted:
As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
well secured in the trunk (see page 118).
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing a wheel.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
life of the wheel is only just over
2,000 miles (approx. 3,500 km).
• Refit the standard wheel as soon as
possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Starting and driving
It is essential when a donor battery is to be
used to jump start the car that the jump
leads be connected correctly to prevent
arcing.
Jump starting
WARNING
To jump start your vehicle:
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery. Therefore, always
avoid sparks and open flames in the
vicinity of the battery.
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
NOTICE
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
Jump starting
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
theaffectedarealiberallywithwater. If
acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-
tity makes contact with the skin, seek
medical help.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumpercablescanreach,butbesurethe
vehicles are not touching each other. If
a poor connection on the negative
jumper cable should exist, it is possible
for damage to be caused to electrical
systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 169
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
the good battery’s negative terminal.
9 Attach the cable to the discharged
battery’s negative terminal.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the
discharged battery. If it does not start
after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
NOTICE
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe
covered by your warranty.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
WARNING
Anelectric fancan startup even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
short that could injure you or would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Starting and driving
For long trips
Before starting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car inspected by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
replace if it shows any signs of wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
• Take an extra remote control and keep it
separate.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
jack in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 171
Car care
Hood________________
Engine ______________
Engine bay ___________
Engine oil ____________
Air filter______________
Transmission fluid ____
Coolant______________
172
173
175
176
178
178
179
Fuses ________________ 199
Wheels _______________ 206
Compact spare wheel ___ 212
Changing a wheel ______ 214
Safety belts ___________ 217
Upholstery and trim ____ 217
Textile carpeting _______ 218
Engine bay____________ 218
Washing______________ 218
Waxing and polishing___ 219
Touching up the paint___ 219
Anti-corrosion treatment 220
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads__________
180
181
182
185
186
186
188
Power steering________
Battery ______________
Drive belt ____________
Wipers and washers ___
Wiper blades _________
Changing bulbs _______
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ____________ 222
Air conditioning (A/C)___ 224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Car care
Hood
Thehandleofthehoodlockislocatedonthe
left under the instrument panel. Open the
hood in the following way:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-
tion and is stopped by a safety catch at
the front edge.
3 Presstheleverofthecatchupwardsand
raise the hood.
When you close the hood you should drop it
from a height of about 8 inches (20 cm),
without slamming it.
Hood release handle
Hood release catch plate
To provide better access to the engine bay,
the hood can be opened further. Lift the
hood towards the windshield once it has
been opened as described above.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 173
Engine families
Engine
Emission control
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
Theseenginefamiliesmeet applicableEPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand
are equipped with the following systems:
The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in-
line engine with twin overhead camshafts
and 16 valves.
systems
Thesystemsforcontrollingemissionstothe
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
The engine is equipped with two balance-
shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
minimum.
The balance shafts are chain-driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods. The effect occurs
twice in each revolution of the engine, coun-
teractingthe vibration fromitsmovingparts,
and at the same time reducing unwanted
engine noise.
• sequential multiport fuel injection system
• three way catalytic converter
• crankcase emissions control system
• evaporative emission system.
The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
from the front), is integrated with the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Car care
Saab Trionic engine management
system
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
NOTICE
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
Allhydrocarbons formed whenrefueling will
be recovered by the car and not released
into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-
ter. When the engine is subsequently
started,theevaporativeemissioncanisteris
gradually purged as air is sucked into it
through a shut-off valve. The hydrocarbon/
air mixture passes through the evap canis-
ter purge valve and into the engine where it
is burned. "Refueling", see page 128.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked 1 time. Otherwise, it is possible for
the Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)
light to illuminate. The following message
will appear on the SID:
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the
TrionicECMhas detected aproblem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position.
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
Tighten fuel filler cap.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Car care
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
NOTICE
Too high oil level can damage the engine.
Check the engine oil level regularly.
1 Park the car on a level ground.
During the Break-in Period (approx.
2 Switch off the engine and wait for
2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
normal operating temperature.
3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
a clean rag before carrying out the
check.
3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil con-
sumption may be higher than normal.
NOTICE
The level must not be below the MIN mark
on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
result in abnormal oil consumption.
If the oil level is too low, the following mes-
sage will be displayed on the SID:
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently if the car is
being used under certain conditions, see
page 231.
Oil filler cap and dipstick
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Top up as necessary with oil of the recom-
mended grade (see page 238).
Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
properly after topping up the oil to avoid run-
ning problems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 177
Engine oil and oil filter should be changed
according to the service program.
For oil volumes and grades, refer to "Tech-
nical data".
Changing engine oil
WARNING
The oil should be drained when the engine
is warm. The car must stand on level
ground.
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. The risk of cancer
cannot be ruled out.
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
the sump and leave the oil to drain into
a suitable receptacle for at least
10 minutes. Take care, as the oil may be
hot.
2 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
3 Change the oil filter once the engine oil
has drained (see page 178).
• Avoid prolonged skin contact when-
ever possible. Wash the affected area
thoroughly with soap and water after
any contact.
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
Drain plug
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
4 Fill with new oil.
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engineasthiscouldcauseafire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil into the ground or down
a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
oil filters at an appropriate disposal
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Car care
Changing filter
Air filter
1 Unscrew the oil filter cap.
• Lift the cap slightly and carefully pry
apart the cap and the filter housing.
WARNING
• Remove the filter cap.
To ensure reliable operation, only use
an air filter recommended by Saab
Automobile AB.
2 Remove the filter. Have paper towelling
or a rag at hand to catch the oil that
escapes from the filter.
3 Fit a new filter.
4 Check the seal in the cap. Apply a small
amount of new engine oil to the O-ring.
5 Screwonthecap. Thecorrecttightening
torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf ft).
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
Oil filter
Automatic transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 179
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking the coolant level.
Coolant
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie above the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank (boundary between the
upper and lower sections of the tank, see
illustration).
Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
Saab-approved antifreeze and clean water.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal temper-
ature and top up again, as necessary.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
Coolant expansion tank
The properties of the coolant are retained
for the entire service life of the car. There-
fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-
ant.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
The coolant contains 50 % antifreeze and
anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
cooling effect. Lowerconcentrations should
be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
Other makes of antifreeze can damage the
engine and cooling system.
If the coolant level drops too low, the follow-
ing message appears on the SID:
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Car care
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads
NOTICE
If the cooling system needs topping up,
mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
quantity of drinking water or distilled
water before adding it to the system.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed
regularly, as specified in the service
program.
If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
enginecouldstillfreezeandbedamaged.
This is because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the ther-
mostat has opened to allow full circula-
tion.
Brake fluid reservoir
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
Checking
If the brake fluid should require chang-
ing, this must be carried out at a Saab
dealer.
Brake fluid should be changed according to
the service program. Refer to the Warranty
and Service Book.
The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans-
parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.
The fluid level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks.
Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
container.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 181
The foot brake and parking brake are self-
adjusting.
Power steering
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal
pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
the brake pads are worn and need replac-
ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
be checked regularly, as specified in the
service program.
WARNING
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
Checkthelevelofthepower steering fluidin
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point directly forwards
during this check.
Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
down the cap completely and then remove
it again.
The oil level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-
tures the level will be higher, both of which
are acceptable.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
Power steering fluid reservoir
Brake pads should only be changed at a
Saab dealer. To ensure optimum brake
performance, use only Saab genuine
brake pads.
Top up with "CHF 11S power steering fluid".
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Car care
If frequent short journeys are made, the
battery may need extra charging. This can
be done with a battery charger or by taking
the car for a long run.
If the battery is not being charge while the
engine is running, the following message
will appear on the SID:
Battery
WARNING
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the
battery.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Check the drive belt (see page 185). If the
belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
the battery may not be charged and the A/C
compressor may not work.
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte level.
Level correct if level indicator dark
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Check thechargestateandelectrolytelevel
of the battery regularly.
NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe
stored away from sub-zero temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 183
Always connect the positive (red) cable to
the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
both battery leads when boost charging the
battery.
NOTICE
• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger.
• Do not connect the battery termi-
nals, + and –, incorrectly.
Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
unlock the battery cover.
Battery bracket
• Serious damagecanoccur to the car’s
electricalsystem ifabattery oralterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
• Exercise special care when removing
and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
not to damage the battery disconnect
switch.
A car with standard equipment specifica-
tions and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
may only be sufficient for about 15 days.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Car care
Battery disconnect switch
WARNING
If the battery disconnect switch has
tripped, do not reset it until you have visu-
ally inspected the car’s electrical system.
If there are visible signs of damage, have
the car checked at a Saab dealer before
resetting the disconnect switch.
A crash could cause a short circuit in the
alternator or starter motor. A disconnect
switchbythebattery’spositiveterminalcuts
offthebatteryfromthealternatorandstarter
motor when the airbags and seatbelt pre-
tensioners are detonated.
Battery disconnect switch with reset
button
NOTICE
Exercisespecialcarewhenremovingand
fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to
damage the battery disconnect switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 185
Drive belt
WARNING
• Keephands and clothingclearofdrive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting the drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
Drive belt
NOTICE
A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
result in:
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
• insufficient engine cooling
• no charge to the battery
• no A/C compressor function
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine. It is driven by a
poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Car care
Wipers and washers
Wiper blades
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
We recommend Saab washer fluid for
cleaning.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
cleanthewindshieldwithSaabwasherfluid.
This is particularly important if the car has
been through an automatic car wash, as
thesesometimesleaveawaxcoatingonthe
windshield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Change of wiper blades
Washer fluid reservoir
To fit new blades:
Washers
1 Press in the catch (1).
2 Pull the complete wiper blade down-
wards so that it comes away from the
wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
from the arm.
WARNING
Takecare not tospillwasher fluid concen-
trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
concentrate can contain flammable ingre-
dients such as alcohol.
The reservoir capacity is 5.5 qts (5.2 litres).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 187
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers are
deactivated. This is in order to prioritize the
windshield. The following message is
displayed on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Headlight washers are only available on
certain markets.
Fill with amixture of "Saabwasher fluid" and
water as recommended by the table on
the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
page 76).
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated temporarily while washing the wind-
shield. This function can be programmed;
contact a Saab dealer.
Washer jets
The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Car care
If a brake light bulb fails
If a brake light bulb fails, the adjacent tail light will act as a brake light
to ensure traffic safety. Change the broken bulb when possible.
Changing bulbs
All rear light bulbs are of the same type and rated 21 W, with the
exception of the license plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
WARNING
Wrong bulb fitted
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine
to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving
parts.
If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a rating is fitted, a bulb
failure message will be shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
can damage the reflector).
If the following message is displayed but the bulb shines, it is most
likely that an incorrect bulb has been fitted.
The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off.
NOTICE
Right high beam failure.
Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible
short-circuiting.
Note:
Autochecking of lights
When changing bulbs, fit the same type of bulb (e.g. Long-Life)
as that removed.
The bulbs that are most important from the point of view of traffic
safety are monitored by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.
Headlight aiming, page 226.
Example of SID message:
Left low beam failure.
The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights,
reversing lights, license plate lighting, side marker lights and side
direction indicators.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 189
Bi-Xenon headlight, main and dipped beam (certain
variants only)
WARNING
Bi-Xenon headlights are high tension. All work on Bi-Xenon head-
lights, including changing bulbs, must be carried out by dealer
personnel.
Xenon headlights produce roughly three times as much light as
halogen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
Contact a Saab dealer to have a Bi-Xenon
headlight changed
Cars with Bi-Xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The level-
lingsystemcomprisestwosensors, oneonthefrontsuspensionand
oneontherearsuspension,andacontrolunitbytheenginebayfuse
box. Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s load
to prevent dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be dis-
played on the SID:
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Car care
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the low beam bulb
Left-hand side
Low beam, halogen
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
Both sides
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 191
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the high beam bulb
Left-hand side
High beam, halogen
Left-hand side
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
Both sides
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Car care
Both sides:
1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it.
2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
6 Refit the battery cover.
Parking lights
The parking light bulb is located in the same
reflector as the main beam bulb.
Front turn signal bulbs
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Remove the battery cover.
3 Remove the cover from the rear of the
headlight.
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
5 Fit the new bulb.
6 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-
light.
7 Refit the battery cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 193
1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
Lower the air shield.
2 Remove the protective cover. Release
the two spring clips securing the bulb.
3 Unplug the connector.
4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
The height of the beam can be adjusted
using a screwdriver inserted through the
hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.
Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
Front fog lights
WARNING
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
rear end can be pulled out.
2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
Change the bulb.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
edge of the opening. Then press in the
front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge.
• Always use axle stands. Refer to
the informationonjacks on pages214
and 215.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Car care
Tail lights
1 Turn signals
2 Tail lights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
Side marker lights
Stoplights, tail lightsandturnsignal
bulbs
1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
part can be pulled out.
2 Fit the new bulb.
1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the
lights.
2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
that secures the bulb holder.
3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
3 When refitting, make sure that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge of the bumper trim.
4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
holder home so that the plastic lug
snaps into place.
If a brake light bulb fails, the adjacent tail
light will act as a brake light to ensure traffic
safety. Change the broken bulb when pos-
sible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 195
Changing bulbs
Reversing lights and rear fog light
Removing the trunk lid trim
Dome light, front
1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb
holder.
2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of
the lens and press the lens home.
1 Remove the two screws securing the
grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.
2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the center of each rivet. Pull out the
rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.
3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so
that it snaps into place.
To refit the trunk lid trim
You can use the button on the handle of the
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
the rivets.
1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Car care
Dome light, rear
License plate lighting
Glove compartment lighting
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both sides of the front edge.
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
correctly seated.
1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Fit the lamp fitting first and then insert
the connector.
2 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
screws.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 197
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-
ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.
Trunk lighting
Courtesy/floor lighting
The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
shelf.
1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
using a screwdriver.
1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
one end.
2 Fit the new bulb.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Fit the lamp fitting first and then insert
the connector.
3 Fit the lamp fitting first and then insert
the connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Car care
Bulb table
No. Designation Watt-
age
1
2
3
H7
55 Headlight
H3
55 Front fog lights
P21W
21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
reversing lights
4
5
PY21W
R10W
21 Direction indicator, front/rear
10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy lighting;
glove compartment lighting
6
7
8
R5W
5
4
5
License plate lighting; trunk lighting
Reading light, rear
T4W
WY5W/W5W
Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
parking lights; front dome lighting
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 199
The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
the fascia, one in the engine bay (additional
small unit in front of battery) and one on the
left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
end of the fascia.
Fuses
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following should be heeded:
• Always consult an Saab dealer before
modifying or adding any electrical
equipment. Failure to do so can result
in the electrical system being
damaged.
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
fuse has blown.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating than specified (see
page 201). The color of the fuse indi-
cates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked without
delay by an Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Car care
MAXI fuses
The car also has a number of large fuses
known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
to protect the car’s electrical system from
being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
number of electrical circuits and functions
and therefore has a higher rating (amper-
age) than the standard fuses. No spare
MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.
NOTICE
If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault
in the electrical system. Have the car
checked at a Saab dealer.
Fuse panel in end of fascia
Aspecialtoolforremovingfusesisprovided
on the hatch on the left-hand end of the fas-
cia. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
squeeze and remove the fuse.
Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
connected to the car’s electrical system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 201
12
13
14
15
30
20
Interior lighting incl. glove compartment
Accessories
Radio, sound system I; control panel,
Infotainment System
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
30
-
Control module in driver’s door
-
-
-
7.5 Manual climate control; fan
-
-
7.5 Headlight levelling switch
7.5 Hands-free; brake light switch; manual climate
control; clutch pedal switch
Fuse panel in end of fascia
No. Amp. Function
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
40
Cigarette lighter
Cabin fan
7.5 Airbag control module
1
2
3
4
15
5
Steering wheel lock
-
-
Steering column unit; ignition switch
Hands-free; cabin CD changer; SID
5
Yaw sensor (cars with ESP)
-
10
10
-
Main instrument unit; manual climate control;
automatic climate control (ACC)
5
7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
(automatic transmission)
6
7
7.5 Brake light switch
20
Fascia fuse panel; fuel filler door
Control module in passenger front door
Fascia fuse panel
8
30
10
30
9
10
Trailer socket; electrical socket in storage compart-
ment between seats
11
15
Data link connection (diagnostics)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Car care
13
14
-
-
-
-
15 15 Seat heating, left seat
16 15 Seat heating, right seat
17
7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror; rain sensor; tire
pressure monitoring
18 15 Sunroof
19
20
21
7.5 Telematics (OnStar)
7.5 DVD player (navigation system)
7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA); control module in
rear doors
22 30 Amplifier, sound system III
23
-
-
24 10 Movement sensor; CD changer in trunk (accessory)
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory
26 30 Right-hand stop light; rear left turn signal; left tail
light; rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate
lighting; trunk lighting; trailer lights
Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side
No. Amp. Function
27
28
29
-
-
-
-
-
-
1–5 MAXI -
6
7
8
9
30 Control module in left rear door
30 Control module in right rear door
20 Trailer
-
-
10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail
light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
trailer lights
11
12
-
-
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 203
Relays (located on back of fuse panel)
R 1 Electrically adjustable seats without memory
R 2 Ignition +15
R 3 -
R 4 Rear window heating
R 5 -
R 6 -
R 7 Trunk lid earth (ground)
R 8 -
R 9 -
R10 -
R11 -
Fuse panel in engine bay
No. Amp. Function
1
2
-
-
10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con-
trol module
3
4
20 Horn
10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch
5
-
-
6
10 Selector lever, automatic transmission
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
9
10
11
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Car care
13
14
-
-
-
-
Relays
R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights
R 2 -
16 30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
front left fog light
R 3 -
R 4 -
R 5 Extra lights
17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed
18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed
19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater
20 10 Headlight levelling
R 6 Horn
R 7 -
R 8 Starter motor
R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
21
22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield
23
-
-
R10 -
R11 Ignition +15
-
-
R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
24 20 Extra lights
R13 -
25 20 Amplifier, sound system II
R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights
26 30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
fog light; right low beam; left high beam
R15 -
R16 -
27 MAXI
–37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 205
Fuse panel in front of battery
No. Amp. Function
1
60
MAXI
Secondary air injection pump (certain models)
2
20
Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
probe)
3
4
10
30
A/C compressor
Main relay
Relays
1 Secondary air injection pump
2 A/C-compressor
3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Car care
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Wheels
Alternative wheels and tires
NOTICE
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changingthecar’swheelsortiresonyour
Saab.
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities
available.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
Widewheels and tires withside walls that
are too low can:
• be damaged in potholes, etc.
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
to be overloaded
• causethewheelstocomeintocontact
with chassis and body components
• affect the function of the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP).
The speed and load limits of the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 209.
Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted
on the Saab 9-3. The permissible offset is
1.61 inch (41 mm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 207
Note: Low tire pressure also causes prema-
ture tire wear and increased fuel consump-
tion.
Tire pressure
Automatic tire pressure monitoring
(option, certain variants only)
WARNING
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 245).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
0.3 bar(4 psi). Whenthetemperatureofthe
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
WARNING
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
The system is intended to aid the driver.
The driver is always ultimately responsi-
ble for ensuring that the tire pressure is
correct.
• punctures
• separation of the tire and tread
• damage to the sidewalls
• damage to the rims on poor roads
• poor handling characteristics.
The pressuremonitoring system consistsof
a sensor in each wheel, a detector in each
wheel housing and a receiver. The sensors
are located inside the wheels directly adja-
cent to the air valves.
Neverreducethepressureofahottire.Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Soft tires will cause faster wear than over-
pressurized tires.
NOTICE
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Note: Remember to adjust the tire pressure
if you change the load in the car or intend to
cruise at a speed that is substantially differ-
ent from normal.
Great care must be taken when changing
tires soas not todamage the sensors that
are integrated in the valves.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Car care
The receiver is located in the trunk. Tire
pressure information is sent wirelessly to
the receiver.
The system checks the tire pressure when
the car is travelling over 18 mph (30 km/h).
The system is "self-learning", which means
that the position of the wheels can be
changed without requiring adjustments to
the monitoring system. The spare wheel
does not have a sensor.
The sensorbatterieshaveanaverage lifeof
10 years. The batteries cannot be changed
but require the sensor units to be replaced.
The system does not warn if a tire is overin-
flated.
Valve with sensor
Valve without sensor
If the tire pressure drops
If the tire pressure continues to drop, the
SID will issue a warning alarm when the
pressure is 0.6 bar (9 psi) below the recom-
mended value.
If the tire pressure drops 0.3 bar (4 psi)
below the recommended pressure, the SID
will issue a warning as to which tire is
affected.
Flat tire front left.
Make a safe stop.
Tire pressure low,
front left.
Check tires.
Reduce speed (avoid heavy braking and
violent steering wheel movements) and
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
Change the wheel.
Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 209
Malfunction
Shifting the wheels
WARNING
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of 195/65 R15 91H:
Tire pressure
system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Always move rear left to front left and rear
right to front right, so that the direction of
rotation remains the same.
The message shown above will be dis-
played on the SID if:
195 Tire section width, mm
65 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
as a percentage of the section
width
• a wheel without pressure sensor is fitted
(e.g. spare wheel)
• one, two or three pressure sensors are
broken or missing
• two or more detectors are missing or
broken
• the receiver malfunctions
• a fault arises in the system.
R Radial ply
15 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead
seats
91 Tire load index
H Speed rating
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
The messageshown aboveisnotdisplayed
if none of the wheels have sensors, such as
if winter wheels without sensors are fitted.
Tire load indices
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
The wheels should be marked, L (left) and
R (right), when changing between summer
and winter (snow) tires. This ensures that
the direction of rotation of the wheels is the
same when they are refitted. Fit the tires in
best condition to the rear wheels.
93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
Speed ratings
S Tire approved for speeds up to
110 mph (180 km/h)
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Car care
Winter tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (US)
Traction
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
areAA, A, B andC. These gradesrepresent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
WARNING
Tire quality grading (cars sold in
U.S.)
The traction grade assigned to a tire is
based onstraight-ahead braking, traction
test and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
New tires must be graded and labeled in
accordance with new Federal regulations.
Standard tests are conducted to measure
performance in the areas of traction and
temperature resistance. Refer to the tire
sidewallforthespecificqualitygradesofthe
tires provided on your new Saab. Compact
spare tires are exempt.
DOT QUALITY GRADES
• Treadwear.
• Traction AA, A, B, C.
• Temperature A, B, C.
Allpassenger cartires must conform toFed-
eral safety requirements inadditiontothese
grades.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 211
Temperature
Wear indicators
The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life. Excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109.
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only 2/
32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Wear indicator
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for a tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Car care
Tire date code
Compact spare wheel
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
Tires havea code thatspecifiestheir dateof
manufacture. The first two digits denote the
week number and the last two digits the
year.
WARNING
The spare wheel or punctured wheel
must be stowed under the trunk floor, and
secured in place with the retaining nut.
Compact spare
Accordingly, a date code of 3701 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 37,
2001.
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel. Its use is
only permitted when a standard wheel has
sustained a puncture. The maximum life of
the wheel is only just over 2,000 miles
(3,500 km).
Date code
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The tire pressure should be 60 psi
(420 kPa). Put the punctured wheel in the
spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
Driving with the compact spare wheel, see
page 167.
Have the standard wheel repaired and refit-
ted as soon as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 213
The spare wheel, the tools and the jack with
its crank are carried under a panel in the
trunk.
Foldthecarpetingforwardtoeaseaccessto
the tools and spare wheel.
The screwdriver handle has a "button" for
removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
must be removed when changing the light
bulb in the trunk lid (see page 195).
Spare wheel (under trunk floor)
NOTICE
To avoid damaging an alloy wheel with a
flat tire, this can be placed outside up in
the spare-wheel well but only while driv-
ing to the closest workshop.
Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
and you can use its "Speed warning" func-
tion, to monitor driving speed since you
must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment (see page 118).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Car care
Changing a wheel
• The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown
forward and cause personal injury in
the event of a crash or if the car rolls
over.
WARNING
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to
support the car during repair work
or servicing.
• Do not use the jack on a car other than
your Saab 9-3.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads if the car has been driven for
several years exclusively with alloy
wheels.
If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt
hole threads in the brake hubs should
be cleaned before the thinner steel
wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not
be possible to achieve the correct
clamping force, despite tightening the
wheel bolts to the correct torque.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
• Special caremust be takenif the car is
on a slope - use wedge-shaped wheel
chocks!
• Position chocks, one ahead and one
behind, the wheel that is diagonally
opposite to the one to be changed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
• Apply the parking brake and leave the
car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic
transmission: move the selector lever
to the P position.
• Ensure thateverybodyisout of the car
before jacking it up.
• Never start the engine while the car is
jacked up.
• If possible, make sure the jack is
standing on a firm, level surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 215
Marking of jacking points
Jacking points
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc.
When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
be positioned at one of the four jacking
points (front or rear) under the sill members.
If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
be positioned under the normal jacking
points. If the car is equipped with a towbar,
the jack can also be placed under this.
arrow on the sill (see illustration).
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the jacking point in the underside of the
sillmemberandthattheentirefootofthe
jack is steady and flat on the ground.
The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
similar.
Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
the car.
3 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
cover.
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
wheel hub.
6 Fitthewheelandscrewintheboltsinthe
sequence shown on the following page
(opposite pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
the following page.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
If, none the less, you wish to remove the
wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
and pull it straight out.
1 Apply the parking brake and engage 1st
or reverse gear (automatic transmis-
sion: select P).
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the jacking point.
Each jacking point is indicated by an
Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.
Steel wheels: 110 Nm.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
theground. Removethewheelboltsand
lift off the wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
Car care
Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
hub.
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
We advise against using wheels with large
ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-
ponents are then more exposed to slush,
road salt and grit.
If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
speedometer can be reprogrammed to
ensureitis as accurateaspossible. Contact
a Saab dealer.
NOTICE
• Do not overtighten the bolts using a
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Driving with tire chains, see
page 156
• When refitting a wheel cover, make
sure that the valve protrudes through
the marked recess in the wheel cover.
8 Retightenthewheelboltsafter twenty or
so miles.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.
Steel wheels: 110 Nm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 217
Flat spotting
Safety belts
Upholstery and trim
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
havecooleddown,aflatspotcanforminthe
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
door armrests and headlining, use a
vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other asso-
ciated components must be inspected at
a Saab dealer.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the centre to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experiencedwhenthewheels need bal-
ancing.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safetybelts yourself but visit a Saab
dealer.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.
Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
thin oil, must be removed at once with an
absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-
ling. Then clean with a stain remover.
White spirit is recommended for removing
grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
may also be used.
Check the function of the safety belts regu-
larly as follows:
• Holdthediagonalstrapand pull it sharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
should be replaced.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-
cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
warm water and a detergent or have them
replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Car care
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
Textile carpeting
Washing
Textile carpeting should be vacuum
cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
cleanedusinga brush or spongeandcarpet
shampoo.
The bodywork must be washed frequently.
When the car is new, the body should be
washed by hand using plain cold water and
a clean, soft brush through which the water
flows. Automatic carwashes should be
avoided when the car is new.
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discolouration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
the patina resulting from use is often consid-
ered desirable in leather. But if the leather is
allowed to becometoo grubby, itcan startto
look shabby.
The leather upholstery should be cleaned
and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc-
tion with spring and autumn inspections. In
very warm, dry climates the leather may
need more regular reconditioning. Recom-
mended conditioner – Saab Leather Care
Lotion.
For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
are not earthed (grounded) must not be
used out of doors.
After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
detergent can be added to the water, which
should be lukewarm.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolour the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
the dirt.
Engine bay
The engine bay should be cleaned with an
engine degreasant and rinsed with hot
water. The headlights must be covered
over. Do not use a pressure washer.
Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol-
vent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally-friendly degreasants.
Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
the paintwork.
Do not use unknown harsh polishing
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
soap or hot water.
NOTICE
Donotusealcohol-basedcleanersonthe
plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
these can cause a crackling effect on the
lenses.
The door mirrors should be folded in
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 219
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of thecarby handifthecar is usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the inside of window glass using a
proprietary window cleaner. This is particu-
larly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
to prevent misting.
Touching up the paint
NOTICE
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-
corrosionwarrantydoesnotcovercorrosion
resulting from untreated defects.
• Try yourbrakesonleavingacarwash.
Wet brake discs reduce the perfor-
mance of the brakes.
• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
phone, must be removed if the car
goes through an automatic car wash.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with
a pressure washer, as this can
damage them.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, such as the
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
washer fluid. This is especially important if
the car has been washed in an automatic
car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
used that can contaminate the windshield
and impair the performance of the wipers.
Waxing and polishing
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to go dull through oxidation. Other
than in exceptional cases, do not use abra-
sive polishes containing a cutting agent on
a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly
before waxing or polishing.
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin
layers of topcoat until the surface of the
repaired area is flush with the surrounding
paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Car care
Two-coat enamel
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car undergoes a series of anti-
corrosion processes during production.
These include electrophoretic priming,
polyester-based coating to protect against
stone chip damage and corrosion, and
treatment of body cavities and members
with thin, penetrating rustproofing oil.
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
In addition, most body panels, such as the
hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Then apply the primer, base colour and
finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
best finish, apply two or three coats of
primer.
The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
prone to damage. This applies particularly
to the underside of the car and inside the
wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
like that are thrown up can give rise to cor-
rosion where the underseal has worn away.
The extent of this obviously depends on the
conditions in which the car is used.
Surface treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
4 Cathodic ED 30 µm
5 Intermediate coat 40 –45 µm
6 Metallic base/solid base 13 µm
7 Clear enamel 45 µm
Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
underside of the car often and to inspect the
condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-
sionwarrantydoesnotrelievethecarowner
oftheneedtocarryoutnormalmaintenance
to the rustproofing and to make good any
damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 221
Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
prevent the onset of corrosion.
Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
expired, it makes good sense to continue to
maintain the rustproofing.
Seams in the body, especially those in the
doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera-
ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by
grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
ofcondensation. Keeptheseamscleanand
at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen-
etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
dealer will be pleased to give you further
advice.
What causes rust?
Preventive maintenance
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish.
Body panelsmay rustthrough if theprocess
is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
water is trapped or where the car’s panels
are continuously damp.
Damage to paint and undercoating by
stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-
ately exposes metal to air and moisture.
Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
Areasofthecountrywithhighhumidityhave
a greater potential for rust problems, espe-
cially where salt is used on roads or there is
moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
may also damage paint and promote rust-
ing.
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Performa-
tion Limited Warranty described in the war-
ranty booklet.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse
conditions, where there is a rapid
buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
your car at least once a week. After
extreme exposure to salted snow or
slush, evidenced by a white film on the
car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
washing will prevent paint damage from
acid rain and other airborne contami-
nants such as tree sap and bird drop-
pings. If any of these contaminants are
noticed on the car the finish should be
washed immediately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flushoff heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Car care
2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
the spring.
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairspromptly. Afterwashingorafter
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check underneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
necessary. Pay particular attention to the
fenders and wheel housings, which are
exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
the composition has worn or flaked off, the
steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
may run off or fall off when dry.
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-
monplace for a long time now.
To facilitate the sorting of other materials,
plastic parts, for instance, have been
marked to identify the precise nature of the
plastic.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratchesorminorfinishdamage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damageshouldberepairedimmediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibilityandarenot coveredunder
warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 223
1 A-pillar trim: PP, PP/EPDM
2 Windshield trim: PP, PP/EPDM
3 Seals: EPDM
4
4 Rear window seal: PUR
5 C/D-pillar trim: PP
2
3
5
1
6
6 Tail light: PMMA
7 Rear bumper:
shell – PP/EPDM
7
8
core – expanded PP
8 Fuel tank: PE
9 Side window seal: PP/EPDM
10 A-pillar trim, textile: PC/ABS
11 Side trim: PVC
12 Rearview mirror: ABS
13 Sill scuff plate: PP/EPDM
14 Wheel arch liner: PP
15 Wheel cover: PA
16 Direction indicator lamp lens: PMMA
17 Front spoiler: PP/EPDM
18 Front bumper:
9
22
21
20
19
10
shell – PP/EPDM
core – expanded PP
11
12
19 Washer fluid reservoir: PE
20 Grille: ABS
21 Fan shroud: PP
22 Scuttle panel finisher: PC/ASA
14
13
16
15
18
17
POM
PPO
PP
PUR
PVC
Acetal plastic
ABS
ASA
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene
Acrylonitrile-styrene (acrylic
plastic)
Polyphenylene oxide (plastic)
Polypropylene
Polyurethane
Polyvinyl chloride
EPDM Ethylene-propylene rubber
PA
PC
PE
Polyamide (plastic)
Polycarbonate (plastic)
Polyethylene
PMMA Polymethyl methacrylate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Car care
Troubleshooting
Inadequate cooling
Air conditioning (A/C)
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked at a Saab dealer.
a Check that the controls for temperature
and air distribution are correctly set; see
"Manual climate-control system" on
page 79.
b Check that the condenser (in front of the
radiator) has not become clogged with
dirt and insects.
c Make sure that the compressor drive
belt does not slip (see page 185).
d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor (see page 201).
WARNING
• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
system must be carried out at a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
Note:
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-
tion that forms on the evaporator is drained
off under the car. When the car is parked,
this may result in a small puddle forming on
the ground. The warmer the air and the
higher the relative humidity, the more con-
densation will be produced.
• The A/Csystemispressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
other personal injury.
NOTICE
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
• Never mix R 134a with other refriger-
ants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 225
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Maintenance
NOTICE
• Applicable to the manual climate control
system - Duringcoldmonthstheair condi-
tioning should be switched on once or
twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
during highway driving once the engine is
warm.
This action saves the gaskets in the
compressor from being spoiled. The
compressor uses a lubricant that circu-
lates with the coolant.
Do not use a pressure washer when
cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
the risk of damage.
• The compressor drive belt should be
inspected under the regular service
program.
• Clean away dirt and insects from the
condenser and radiator to prevent clog-
ging. Whenwashing the car, usethehose
to spray the radiator and condenser
(located in front of the radiator) from both
sides (both from the front of the car and
from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
pressure washer.
Note:
The A/C system cannot be switched on
whentheoutsidetemperatureisbelow32°F
(0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
always have the A/C button pressed in. The
A/C system will then cut in automatically
when the outside temperature is high
enough.
Caution: Do not hose down the radia-
tor and condenser while the engine is
hot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Car care
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be fully assembled
andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicleshould not have anysnow, ice
or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
Headlight aiming
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improveyourabilitytoseethebeam ofthe
low beam headlight being aimed.
An optical headlamp aimer can also be
used and will than replace the wall.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
dangeroffingersandhandsbeinginjured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas
described in the following procedure.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 227
Vertical aiming device
1 Wall or garage door.
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
1 Aiming marker on headlight lens
from the ground to the recorded dis-
tance(seepoint4)anddrawahorizontal
line the width of the vehicle.
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming devices there are two vertical
aiming devices which shall be turned
simultaneously and the same amount of
turns.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto
the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Car care
markers on the headlight lens.
Thenfollowtheinstructionsintheoptical
headlight aimer instruction manual and
point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
Correctly adjusted low beam
5 Cars with Bi-Xenon lights:
Bi-Xenonlightswithautomaticheadlight
levelling system must first do a refer-
encerunbeforeaiming:Starttheengine
and let the headlights do a reference
run. Turn off theengine but leavethelow
beam on.
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when aim-
ing. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up that may cause
damage to the headlight.
Cars with halogen lights:
Turn on the low beam headlights.
Both variants:
6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
simultaneously in the same direction
indicated on the headllight until the hori-
zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
with the horizontal line on the wall.
7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
lens of the optical headlight aimer
device at the intersection of the two
Place apiece of cardboard or equivalent
(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 229
Maintenance and owner assistance
Maintenance schedule __ 230
Owner assistance ______ 232
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) _____________ 233
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government__________ 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
Maintenance and owner assistance
.
SERVICE INTERVALS
Maintenance schedule
The maintenance schedule begins with an
Inspection Service at 30 days. A time for
service message will illuminate on the Saab
Instrument Display (SID) when the car is
due for regular maintenance. There are twi
different messages that will appear:
NOTICE
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always a good practice!
The Check-up will be done by your Saab
dealer at no charge and should be done
as close as possible to the scheduled 30
days.
TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections. This mes-
sage is set by the engine management
system which calculates service intervals
based on several factors including driving
habits, ambient temperature, number of
coldstarts,mileagedrivenandelapsedtime
since the last service. Based on this algo-
rithm, this message may appear at mileage
as low a 8,000 or as high as 15,000 miles.
If mileage accumulation does not occur, the
message will be set, and maintenance
required at a maximum of 2 years.
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour
best choice.
TIME FOR MAJOR SERVICE will be set
when additional maintenance is necessary,
such as air filter or spark plug replacement.
This message will appear at 30,000 mile
intervals. When either message is dis-
played, contact your Saab Dealer for a ser-
vice appointment.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
in a timely manner may result in serious
damage to key components or systems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 231
HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
COUPONS
Engine oil and filter changes
Service record retention
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the “Techni-
cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
The use of extra additives in the oil is not
necessary and is not recommended, and
may be harmful to turbochargers.
It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser-
vice records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-
cated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to docu-
ment that all necessary maintenance has
been done.
When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
scheduled maintenance, present the War-
ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-
vice manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
responsible for quality assurance at the
dealership will also sign and stamp the
record with the dealer identification stamp.
HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA-
NIZED
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
any of the following conditions:
The service record is comprised of a main-
tenance log and aseparate log sheet for list-
ing any additional service and repairs.
There are five coupons at the front of the
section, three of which are for documenting
extra engine oil and filter changes, one for
extra automatic transmission fluid services
necessary for severe service conditions,
one for brake fluid changes and one for
coolant flushes. These are followed by log
sheets for all normal scheduled mainte-
nance in the order it is to be performed,
beginning with the “First Service”.
• Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling
(frequent stop-and-go traffic).
• Most trips are through dusty areas (such
as construction zones).
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services at 5,000 mile
(8,000 km) intervals. These conditions
cause the engine oil to break down faster.
The Warranties and Service Record Book-
let has provisions to record extra oil
changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Maintenance and owner assistance
Service costs
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem
assistance
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
coveredunder an applicable Saabwarranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
location.
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
RoadsideAssistance.Ifthebookletislostor
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
and9-5carlinescanbeorderedthroughthe
dealer. These are comprehensive manuals
on CD rom, geared to use by professional
technicians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices for your
model.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and owner assistance 233
Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
800-263- 1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Maintenance and owner assistance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 235
Technical data
General particulars _____ 236
Engine _______________ 238
Engine oil_____________ 238
Fuel__________________ 240
Engines ______________ 240
Electrical system_______ 240
Drive belt _____________ 240
Manual transmission ___ 241
Automatic transmission_ 241
Suspension ___________ 242
Steering ______________ 242
Brake system__________ 242
Wheels and tires _______ 243
Plates and labels_______ 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Technical data
General particulars
Overall length, including bumpers: ______ 182.3'' (4630 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors _____ 80.2'' (2038 mm)
Maximum height ____________________ 56.9'' (1445 mm)
Wheelbase ________________________ 105.3'' (2675 mm)
Track:
Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1520 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)
Ground clearance at GVW ____________ approx. 120 mm
Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The precise curb weight of the vehicle (weight ready for driving + driver á 154 lbs.
(70 kg) and load capacity are specified in the vehicle registration documents.
Number of seats (incl. driver) __________
Turning circle:
5
V.I.N. plate
Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 37.4 ft. (11.4 m)
Curb to curb ______________________ 35.4 ft. (10.8 m)
Trunk length:
Rear seat raised___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)
Rear seat lowered _________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)
Trunk volume (SAE) _________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l )
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 237
Curb weight
WARNING
(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res- 3174–3461 lbs.
ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel) _ (1440–1570 kg)
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4343–4453 lbs.
(1970–2020 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Front ____________________________ 248 lbs. (1125 kg)
Rear ____________________________ 2226 lbs. (1010 kg)
Weight distribution:
• When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
folded down.
Curb weight + driver (154 lbs. (70 kg)),
front/rear_________________________ approx. 60/40 %
Trailer:
GVW, front/rear____________________ approx. 50/50 %
Maximum roof load_________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
Maximun load in trunk ______________ 175 lbs. (80 kg)
Trailer with brakes___________________ Max. 3500 lbs.
(1588 kg)
Trailer without brakes ________________ Max. 1000 lbs.
(450 kg)
Recommended towball load ___________ 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg)
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
with brakes _______________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
Whentowing atrailer, increasethe pressure
of the rear tires by 0.2 bar (3 psi).
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 157).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Technical data
Engine
Type:
Engine oil
Four cylinders,
double overhead
camshafts,
16 valves, two
balancer shafts,
dual-mass flywheel
Oil grade:
We recommend the use of Saab or Mobile oils, available from
you Saab dealer, for regular oil changes.
These oils are specially developed from high-quality compo-
nents to meet the demands of extended service intervals (max.
18,000 miles (30,000 km) or 2 years). Saab and Mobil oils are
tested and approved in accordance with the GM standard for
long-life oils. Such gasoline engine oils are given the designa-
tion GM-LL-A 025. The requirements are the same for diesel
oils, though these are given the designation GM-LL-B 025.
Cylinder bore_______________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
Stroke ____________________________ 3.386'' (86 mm)
Swept volume ______________________ 122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
Idling speed________________________ 670 rpm
To ensure optimum engine performance, with regard to lu-
brication, the ability to dissolve residues and the neutrali-
sation of combustion products in the oil, for a service
interval of 18,000 miles (30,000 km) or a maximum of
2 years, the engine oil used must fulfil GM-LL-A 025 (gaso-
line engines) or GM-LL-B 025 (diesel engines).
Antifreeze _________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Coolant capacity ____________________ 7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
Only oil of the above grades may be used.
Oils of the above grades contain the additives required for
the engine to function well. We advise against the use of
further additives.
The gasoline engine oil is unique in that not only does it fulfil the
stringent requirements demanded by API and ACEA standards
but also meets ACEA requirements for fuel-saving properties.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 239
Other grade classifications:
Viscosity:
API and ACEA designations can also be found on the packag-
ing alongside the GM designations GM-LL-A 025 and
GM-LL-B 025. Oil for gasoline engines classified in accordance
with API standards (American Petroleum Institute) can include
SH (since 1993), SJ (since 1996) and SL (from 2001) classes.
SL class oils fulfil the most stringent requirements. These grade
classes are most often combined with the corresponding class-
es for diesel engines. The class designations for diesel engines
begin with the letter "C" (Commercial). For example, a grade
combination suitable for both types of engine could be API SJ/
CF or SL/CF.
The viscosity of oil is classified according to the SAE standard
(SAE: Society of Automobile Engineers). Nowadays, multigrade
oils are always used in cars. The properties of these oils facili-
tate starting the car in cold weather but mean that the oil is also
sufficiently viscous to coat all moving parts under all operating
conditions.
Multigrade oils are graded with two viscosities, e.g. 0W-30,
where the 0W meets certain viscosity requirements at –22°F (–
30°C), while the 30 fulfils requirements at a temperature of
212°F (100°C).
The approved gasoline engine oil, GM-LL-A 025, has a vis-
cosity of SAE 0W-30.
Under ACEA nomenclature, oils are divided into Class A for
petrol engines and Class B for diesel engines. There is a further
class for heavy diesel engines. Each class is divided into
three or four (diesel) grades where grades 2 and 3 (diesel: 4)
normally encompass products comprising semi and fully-
synthetic components.
Oil capacity, including filter (oil change) __ 6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
In the same way as in the API system, gasoline and diesel en-
gine specifications are combined for products that can be used
in both types of engine. For example, a grade designation could
be ACEA A2/B2 or ACEA A3/B3-B4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
Technical data
Fuel
Electrical system
Fuel tank capacity ___________________ 16.3 U.S. gal. (62 l)
Voltage ___________________________ 12 V
For optimum performance
Saab recommends:
Battery capacity ____________________ 60 or 70 Ah
Starter motor_______________________ 1.8 kW
Alternator rating:____________________ 140 A/14 V
Firing order ________________________ 1-3-4-2
Spark plugs________________________ NGK PFR6T-10G
Electrode gap ______________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
2.0t (175 hp) ______________________ Unleaded 90 AON
2.0 Turbo (210 hp) _________________ Unleaded 93 AON
Engines
2.0t Ecopower
Drive belt
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 175 hp (129 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____ 195 ft.lb. (265 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1
Outside length______________________ 40.472'' (1028 mm)
2.0 Turbo Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 210 hp (147 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ____ 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
Compression ratio__________________ 9.5:1
Drive belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 241
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission
Type _____________________________ Fully synchronized
Type _____________________________ Electronically-
controlled,5-speed,
with final drive gear
and differential
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter,planetary
gears and integral
final drive.
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3,
4 and 5.
Oil type (for topping up)_______________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity ________________________ 2.0 qts. (1.9 l)
Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (5th gear):
1.8t and 2.0t ______________________ 27–30/43–45
Selector lever positions_______________ P, R, N, D, M
Oil capacity, total____________________ 7.6 qts. (7.2 litres)
Oil type ___________________________ Saab 3309
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
1.8t, 2.0t and 2.0T _________________ 28–30/46–49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Technical data
Suspension
Brake system
Spring type, front and rear_____________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
Foot brake (ABS) ___________________ Hydraulic disc
brakes with vacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels (some
variants also have
ventilated rear
Front ____________________________ 7.0'' (178 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 8.3'' (212 mm)
Dampers, front and rear ______________ Gas-filled dampers
Steering
discs).EBDfunction
(see page 142).
Steering___________________________ Power-assisted
Handbrake ________________________ Acts on rear wheels
steering gear of
rack-piniontypeand
telescopic jointed
steering column
Brake fluid_________________________ To DOT 4.
Do not use DOT 5.
Disc diameter, 2.0t:
Number of turns, lock to lock___________ 3.0
Front ____________________________ 11.22 in. (285 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 10.94 in. (278 mm)
Total friction area of brake pads:
Oil type ___________________________ Power steering fluid
CHF 11S
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
Disc diameter, 2.0 Turbo:
Front ____________________________ 11.89 in. (302 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 11.57 in. (294 mm)
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 243
Wheels and tires
NOTICE
Summer tires
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
6.5 x 15" _________________________ 215/60R15 94 H
6.5 x 16" _________________________ 215/55R16 93 H
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
7 x 17"___________________________ 215/50R17 91 W or
225/45R17 91 W
Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 17".
Snow chains must not be used on the rear wheels.
7.5 x 18" (accessory) _______________ 225/45 R18 91 W
Always contact a Saab dealer if you plan to fit other wheels or
tires than those fitted as standard.
NOTICE
Winter (snow) tires:
Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted.
6.5 x 15" wheel ____________________ 195/65 R15 91 Q
M+S
Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
18" wheels.
6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 205/55 R16 91 Q
M+S or
215/55 R16 93 Q
M+S
Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.
7 x 17" wheel _____________________ 205/50R1793QRF
M+S
Compact spare:
Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 125/80 R16 97 M or
125/85 R16 97 M
Pressure _________________________ 4.2 bar (60 psi)
Maximum life______________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Technical data
Recommended tire/engine combinations
2.0t
2.0 Turbo
Summer tires
215/60 R15 94 H
215/55 R16 93 H
x
x
x
–
–
x
215/50 R17 91 W or
225/45 R17 91 W
225/45 R18 91 W
Winter (snow) tires
195/65 R15 91 Q
195/65 R15 95 Q RF
205/55 R16 91 Q
215/55 R16 93 Q
205/50 R17 93 Q RF
Wheel sizes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
–
–
x
x
x
6.5 x 15"
–
x
x
x
–
x
x
x
6.5 x 16"
7 x 17"
7.5 x 18" (accessory)
RF = Reinforcement (tire with reinforced sidewalls)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 245
Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size
Load/speed
mph (km/h)
Front
Rear
*)
psi/kPa psi/kPa
Summer tires
215/60 R15 94 H
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 38/260 38/260
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 35/240 32/220
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 41/280 38/260
*) Do not exeed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the sur-
rounding air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
(20°C).
Thetirepressurewillincreaseasthetiresbecomewarm(e.g.during
highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
215/55 R16 93 H
215/50 R17 91 W or 1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
225/45 R17 91 W
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 41/280 41/280
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 35/240 35/240
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 41/280 41/280
When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
by 2 psi/10 kPa.
225/45 R18 91 W
Winter tires
195/65 R15 91 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 33/230
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 41/280 41/280
195/65 R15 95 Q RF 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 33/230
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 41/280 41/280
205/55 R16 91 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 39/270 39/270
215/55 R16 93 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 32/220 32/220
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 39/270 39/270
205/50 R17 93 Q RF 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 33/230 33/230
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 38/260 38/260
Spare wheel
125/80 R16 97 M or
125/85 R16 97 M
Max 50 (80)
60/420 60/420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 246
Plates and labels
When contacting your Saab dealer it may
sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
numbers.
1 Modification identity plate (in the spare
wheel compartment)
2 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside wind-
shield
3 Gearbox number
4 Engine number
5 Label for tire pressure and color codes
(trim and body)
6 Certification label
7 Chassis number (stamped on body).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
Technical data
Position:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 5 S X 3 1 016584
cation number:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis components
1
2
3
4
Region ________
Country _______
Manufacturer ___
Product line ____
Y = Northern Europe
S = Sweden
6
7
Body version ___
Gearbox _______
4 = 4-door
5 = 5-speed manual
6 = 6-speed manual
9 = 5-speed automatic
3 = Saab Automobile AB
F = 9-3
S = 2.0t
Y = 2.0 Turbo
8
9
Engine variant __
Check digit_____
B = 9-3 Linear
D = 9-3 Arc
F = 9-3 Vector
5
Model series ___
0-9 or X
10 Model year ____
11 Factory _______
12 Serial number __
3 = 2003
1 = Trollhättan
000001-999999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Technical data
Car alarm
Several of the systems in your Saab
can be customized to better suit
your individual needs. Contact your
Saab dealer
Listed below are a number of examples of
programmable functions.
• Cabin lighting switched on when the car
alarm is tripped.
Central locking system
• Sensitivity of the movement sensor.
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
• Audible signal produced by horn or car
alarm siren.
Consult a Saab dealer for further informa-
tion.
Listed below are a number of examples of
programmable functions.
• Audibleconfirmationof arming/disarming
the car alarm.
• Automatic unlocking when car stopped
and remote control removed from the igni-
tion switch.
• Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
30 s after being shut.
• Length of audible and visual acknowl-
edgements.
• Possibility to have the trunk lid unlocked
when doors unlocked, yes/no.
• Central locking relocks the car automati-
callyifadoororthetrunklidisnotopened,
yes/no. If the car has an alarm, this is
rearmed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 249
Warning and indications that can be
shown on the SID
Hot engine.
Make a safe stop.
Run engine on idle.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Symbol Text
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Key not accepted.
Contact Saab dealer.
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Remote control battery low.
Replace battery.
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Use your seatbelt.
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Contact Saab dealer.
X: standard key
Y: valet key
Key No: Z
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
Lock system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Release park brake.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Turn off engine.
Contact Saab dealer.
Contact Saab dealer.
Steering wheel locked.
Pull out key, turn steering
wheel. Try again.
A/C off due to high engine
temperature.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Engine malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Tap brakes lightly before
using cruise control.
Theft protection failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Reduced engine power.
Contact Saab dealer.
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Tighten fuel filler cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Technical data
Tire pressure low,
front right.
Check tires.
Rear left seat backrest
unlocked.
Right low beam failure.
Tire pressure low,
front left.
Check tires.
Rear right seat backrest
unlocked.
High mounted brake light
failure.
Parking assistance malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Left front turn signal
failure.
Flat tire rear left.
Make a safe stop.
Parking assistance sensor
interference.
Left rear turn signal
failure.
Flat tire rear right.
Make a safe stop.
Right front turn signal
failure.
Flat tire front left.
Make a safe stop.
Close doors.
Right rear turn signal
failure.
Flat tire front right.
Make a safe stop.
Left brake light failure
Left high beam failure.
Left low beam failure.
Rear fog light failure.
Right brake light failure.
Right high beam failure.
Left rear position light
failure.
Time for service.
Right rear position light
failure.
Tire pressure
system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Tire pressure low,
rear left.
Check tires.
Tire pressure low,
rear right.
Check tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 251
Bootlid, driving when open _______ 163
Bootlid, opening ________________ 41
Brake fluid, grade ______________ 242
Brakes _______________________ 141
Braking ______________________ 141
Bulb changing _________________ 188
Bulb table ____________________ 198
Compass _____________________ 115
Condensation water, A/C _________ 82
Coolant ______________________ 179
Cruise control _________________ 140
Cup holder ____________________ 107
Index
A
A/C __________________________ 82
ABS brakes ___________________ 142
ACC _________________________ 84
Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 98
Air conditioning _________________ 82
Air filter ______________________ 178
Air pressure, tyres ______________ 207
Airbag ________________________ 26
Anchorage eyes _______________ 118
Anti-corrosion treatment _________ 220
Antilock braking system _________ 142
Anti-spin _____________________ 144
Ashtrays _____________________ 108
Autochecking of lights, warning and
D
Date codes, tyres ______________ 212
Deep water, driving through ______ 163
Direction indicator stalk switch _____75
Direction indicators ______________ 75
Donor battery, boost starting ______ 168
Door handles ___________________38
Door mirrors __________________ 110
Drive belt _____________________ 185
Drive belt, length _______________ 240
Driver’s seat with memory _________ 19
Driving at night ________________ 163
Driving in cold climates __________ 155
Driving in deep water ____________ 163
Driving in hot climates ___________ 156
Driving techniques ______________ 153
Driving with a heavy load on
C
Cabin lighting _________________ 105
Car alarm _____________________ 46
Car transport __________________ 166
Care of air conditioning __________ 225
Change of address notification ____ 232
Changing bulbs ________________ 188
Changing engine oil ____________ 177
Changing the battery, remote control 44
Changing wheels ______________ 214
Changing wiper blades __________ 186
Checking the number of
indicator lights _________________ 58
Autodimming ______________111, 112
Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 84
Automatic transmission __________ 134
Automatic tyre pressure monitoring 207
remote controls ________________ 43
Checks before towing a trailer ____ 160
Child safety ____________________ 21
Child safety locks, rear doors ______ 42
Child seats ____________________ 21
Cigarette lighter ________________ 108
Cleaning the engine bay _________ 218
Cleaning upholstery ____________ 217
Climate control system, manual ____ 79
Compact spare ________________ 212
hilly roads ___________________ 136
Driving with a load ______________ 162
Driving with a roof load __________ 161
Driving with the bootlid open ______ 163
Driving with the compact
B
Battery ______________________ 182
Bedding-in of new brake pads ____ 132
Before towing a trailer ___________ 160
Bonnet ______________________ 172
spare wheel __________________ 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Index
Filling up _____________________ 128
Flat spots, tyres ________________ 217
Folding down the rear seat _______ 116
Front fog lights _________________ 74
Front towing eye _______________ 164
Fuel filler flap, emergency opening __ 52
Fuel gauge ____________________ 61
Fuel grade ____________________ 240
Functions, car alarm _____________ 50
Fuse panel in luggage compartment 202
Fuse table ____________________ 201
Fuses _______________________ 199
Headlights _____________________ 72
Heated door mirrors _____________ 83
Horn __________________________ 98
Horn button ____________________ 98
E
ESP, anti-skid system ___________ 146
Economical motoring ___________ 153
Electric engine heater ___________ 154
Electric heating, front seats ____83, 92
Electric windows ________________ 99
Electrical system, technical data ___ 240
Electrically adjustable seats _______ 18
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) _ 146
Electronic steering wheel lock ____ 123
Emergency opening of the narrow
I
Ignition switch _________________ 122
Immobilizer ____________________ 45
Important considerations for driving 125
Important information, petrol-engined
cars with catalytic converters ____ 126
Indicator lights __________________ 54
Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 73
Interior lighting _________________ 105
Interior rearview mirror __________ 111
Intermittent malfunctioning,
backrest ____________________ 119
Emergency operation of the sunroof 104
Engine bay, cleaning ___________ 218
Engine heater _________________ 154
Engine immobilizer ______________ 45
Engine number ________________ 246
Engine oil, checking ____________ 176
Engine oil, grade _______________ 238
Engine oil, volume _____________ 239
Engine temperature gauge ________ 60
Engine, description _____________ 173
Engine, technical data __________ 238
Engines ______________________ 240
Extra electrical socket ___________ 108
G
GDO, garage door opener _______ 112
Garage door opener ____________ 112
Gear selector indicator,
central locking _________________ 40
automatic transmission __________ 62
Gearbox number _______________ 246
Glove compartment _____________ 109
Glove compartment lighting ______ 196
J
Jack _________________________ 214
Jump starting __________________ 168
H
Handbrake ___________________ 148
Hazard warning lights ____________ 75
Head restraints _________________ 20
Headlight flasher ________________ 72
Headlight levelling _______________ 73
K
Key __________________________ 38
Kick-down ____________________ 136
F
Factors affecting fuel consumption _ 153
Filler cap _____________________ 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 253
Memory, driver’s seat ____________ 19
Milometer _____________________ 59
Movement sensor, car alarm ______ 48
Mug holder ___________________ 107
Plates and labels, location ________ 246
Polishing and waxing ____________ 219
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 185
Position lights __________________ 72
Power steering fluid, checking _____ 181
Power steering fluid, grade _______ 242
Pressure gauge _________________ 61
Profiles, customized settings _______ 64
Puncture, changing wheels _______ 214
L
LATCH (child safety) _____________ 22
Labels and plates, location _______ 246
Lashing eyes __________________ 118
Laying the car up ______________ 150
Leather upholstery, cleaning ______ 218
Limp-home ___________________ 126
Limp-home, automatic transmission 137
Load carriers, roof ______________ 161
Load indices, tyres _____________ 209
Load-through hatch _____________ 117
Locking a car with flat battery ______ 41
Locks ________________________ 38
Long-term parking ______________ 150
Luggage compartment __________ 116
Luggage compartment lighting 106, 119
Luggage compartment lighting,
N
Night driving __________________ 163
Number plate lighting, changing ___ 196
Q
O
Quick guide, remote control _______ 39
ORVR _______________________ 174
Oil capacity, engine _____________ 239
Opening handles ________________ 38
Opening the fuel filler flap manually _ 52
Owner assistance ______________ 232
R
Rain sensor ____________________ 77
Rear fog light ___________________74
Rear seats, folding down _________ 116
Rear towing eye _______________ 165
Rear window heating _____________ 83
Rearview mirrors _______________ 110
Recirculation ___________________82
Recommendations for automatic
changing ____________________ 197
P
M
Panic function, car alarm _________ 49
Park Brake Shift Lock ___________ 135
Park Brake Shift Lock,
MAXI fuses ___________________ 200
Main instrument panel ___________ 54
Main/dipped beam ______________ 72
Maintenance schedule __________ 230
Manual climate control ___________ 79
Manual gear selection ___________ 139
Manual gearbox _______________ 133
Manual tripping of car alarm _______ 49
Materials used in the car, reclamation 222
temporary override ____________ 137
Parking ______________________ 148
Parking aid ___________________ 151
Parking brake _________________ 148
Parking on a hill _______________ 149
Pinch protection, electric windows _ 100
Pinch protection, sunroof ________ 104
transmission, towing a trailer ____ 158
Recommendations for manual
gearbox, towing a trailer ________ 159
Recommended fuel grades _______ 128
Recommended snow chains ______ 243
Refueling _____________________ 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Index
Remote control _________________ 38
Remote locking malfunction _______ 40
Reporting safety defects _________ 233
Rev counter ___________________ 59
Reversing lights ________________ 76
Roof lighting __________________ 105
Roof lighting, changing __________ 196
Running-in ___________________ 132
Ski hatch _____________________ 117
Spare wheel __________________ 212
Speed ratings, tyres ____________ 209
Speedometer __________________ 60
Starting the engine _____________ 123
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 98
Steering wheel lock _____________ 123
Storage compartments __________ 109
Sun visor _____________________ 106
Sunroof ______________________ 102
Switches ______________________ 72
Trip computer __________________ 65
Trip meter _____________________ 59
Trolley jack ___________________ 215
Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC ____ 224
Turbo gauge ___________________61
Tyre date code ________________ 212
Tyre markings _________________ 209
Tyre pressure _________________ 207
Tyre pressure monitoring, automatic 207
Tyre sizes ____________________ 243
Tyres ________________________ 206
S
SAHR, head restraint ____________ 20
SID __________________________ 64
SPA _________________________ 151
Saab Information Display _________ 64
Saab Parking Assistance ________ 151
Saab Trionic engine
T
U
TCS _________________________ 144
Technical data _________________ 236
Textile carpeting, cleaning _______ 218
Tightening torque, wheels ________ 216
Tools and spare wheel __________ 212
Touching up paintwork __________ 219
Towbar ______________________ 157
Towbar load __________________ 159
Towing ______________________ 164
Towing a trailer ________________ 157
Towing the car ________________ 165
Traction Control System (TCS) ____ 144
Transmission oil, checking _______ 178
Transmission oil, grade __________ 241
Transmission, automatic _________ 134
Transmission, manual ___________ 133
Transporting the car ____________ 166
Upholstery care ________________ 217
Upholstery, cleaning ____________ 217
Useful tips on night driving _______ 163
Useful tips on starting petrol engines 125
management system __________ 174
Safety belts ____________________ 11
Seatbelts ______________________ 11
Seatbelts, care ________________ 217
Seatbelts, checking _____________ 217
Seats _________________________ 16
Securing a load ________________ 118
Sentronic, manual gear selection __ 139
Service costs _________________ 232
Service information _____________ 232
Service intervals _______________ 230
Service record retention _________ 231
Shifting the wheels _____________ 209
Signalling, horn _________________ 98
V
Vanity mirror __________________ 106
Vehicle identification number _____ 246
Vehicle recovery _______________ 166
W
Warning labels ___________________ 7
Warning lights __________________ 54
Warning triangle ________________76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 255
Washer fluid __________________ 186
Washer jets ___________________ 187
Washers ______________________ 76
Washing _____________________ 218
Waxing and polishing ___________ 219
Wear indicators, tyres ___________ 211
Wheel change _________________ 214
Wheels ______________________ 206
Wheels and tyres, sizes _________ 243
Windscreen washers ____________ 76
Windscreen wipers ______________ 76
Wing mirrors __________________ 110
Winter driving _________________ 155
Wiper blades __________________ 186
Wipers ________________________ 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|